2010 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual M
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 1-1
Instruments and Controls . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview. . . . 4-4
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 4-41
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Universal Remote System . . . . 4-48
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 7-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 8-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 8-16
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 8-23
Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 8-32
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Object Detection Systems . . . . 8-38
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 8-59
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 6-36
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 3-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 3-3
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
iii
Please refer to the purchase
Canadian Vehicle Owners
documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of
the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for
Cadillac Motor Car Division
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer or from:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM
Emblem, CADILLAC, the CADILLAC
Crest and Wreath, and the name
SRX are registered trademarks of
General Motors.
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante:
wherever it appears in this manual.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or
due to changes subsequent to the
printing of this owner manual.
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de
langue française
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25823383 B Second Printing
© 2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
Introduction
Using this Manual
Symbols
WARNING
{
To quickly locate information about
the vehicle use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
Notice: This means there is
something that could result in
property or vehicle damage. This
would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty.
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
A circle with a slash through it is a
safety symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury or
death.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
v
Vehicle Symbol Chart
# : Fog Lamps
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to
the index.
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
0 : Adjustable Pedals
j : LATCH System Child
Restraints
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
} : Power
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar®
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
_ : Tow/Haul Mode
F : Traction Control
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
Introduction
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-1
Exterior Mirrors
Keys, Doors and
Windows
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 1-22
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Keys and Locks
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 1-22
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Windows
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Doors
Liftgate (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Liftgate (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 1-17
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks
Keys
WARNING
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keyless access transmitter is
dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the
vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keyless access
transmitter in the vehicle and they
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keyless
access transmitter in a vehicle
with children.
To remove the key, press the button
near the bottom of the transmitter,
and pull the key out. Never pull the
key out without pressing the button.
See your dealer/retailer if a new key
is needed.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys
in the vehicle, you may have to
damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
Contact Roadside Service if you
are locked out of the vehicle. See
This key, located inside the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
is used for the driver door and
glove box.
Roadside Service on page 12‑8
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-3
.
.
Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑19 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer/retailer or a qualified
technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter functions will work up to
60 m (195 feet) away from the
vehicle.
Changes or modifications to
this system by other than an
authorized service facility could
void authorization to use this
equipment.
With Remote Start and Power
Liftgate Shown, Without Similar
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.
The turn signal indicators may flash
and/or the horn may sound to
indicate locking, see “Locking
Feedback” under Vehicle
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
Keep in mind that other conditions,
such as those previously stated,
can impact the performance of the
transmitter.
.
Check the distance. The
transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle.
Personalization on page 4‑41.
.
Check the location. Other
If the driver door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock except the
driver door, if enabled through the
vehicle personalization. If the
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
passenger door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-4
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keyless Access Operation
Pressing Q may also arm the
theft-deterrent system. See
Anti-Theft Alarm System on
/ (Remote Start): For vehicles
with this feature, press Q and
then press and hold / within
five seconds to start the engine from
outside the vehicle using the RKE
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 1‑9 for additional
information.
Some vehicles have the keyless
access system that lets you lock
and unlock the doors and access
the liftgate without removing the
remote transmitter from your pocket,
purse, briefcase, etc. The keyless
entry transmitter must be within 1 m
(3 feet) of the door being opened.
If the vehicle has this feature, there
will be a body colored touch pad on
the outside front door handles.
page 1‑17
.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
driver door or all doors, see “Door
Unlock Options” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑41
When remotely unlocking the
vehicle at night the fog lamps and
reverse lamps will come on for
about 20 seconds to light your
approach to the vehicle. The turn
signal indicators may flash and/or
the horn may sound to indicate
unlocking. See “Unlock Feedback”
under Vehicle Personalization on
.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release one
time to locate the vehicle. The
exterior lamps flash and the horn
Keyless Unlocking
chirps. Press and hold L for
three seconds to sound the panic
alarm. The horn sounds and the
turn signal lamps flash for
With the transmitter within 1 m
(3 feet), approach the front door and
pull the handle. If the transmitter is
recognized, the door will unlock
and open.
page 4‑41
.
30 seconds, or until L is pressed
again or the vehicle is started.
On some models, pressing and
Entering any door other than the
driver door will always cause all of
the doors to unlock. This is not
customizable.
& (Remote Liftgate Release):
Press until the liftgate begins to
move to open or close the power
liftgate.
holding K will open all of the
vehicle's windows. See Power
Windows on page 1‑24
.
Pressing K will disarm the
theft-deterrent system. See
Anti-Theft Alarm System on
To customize which doors unlock
when the driver’s door is opened,
see “Passive Unlock” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑41.
page 1‑17
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-5
Keyless Locking
You may temporarily disable the
Lock Sensor
keyless locking feature by pressing
and holding the power door unlock
button on the instrument panel for
several seconds with a door open.
Keyless locking will then remain
disabled until the door lock switch is
pressed, or until the vehicle is
turned on.
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this feature allows
you to select whether the doors
automatically lock during normal
vehicle exit. When the vehicle is
turned off and all doors become
closed, the vehicle will determine
how many keyless access
transmitters remain in the vehicle
interior. If at least one keyless
access transmitter has been
removed from the interior of the
vehicle, the doors will lock after
several seconds.
To customize whether the doors
automatically lock when you exit
the vehicle, see “Passive Locking”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑41
.
When all doors are closed and the
ignition is off, the vehicle can be
locked by pressing this area on the
door handle. This feature will be
available for several minutes after
the vehicle has been turned off.
If there are two keyless access
transmitters in the vehicle and
one is removed, the other will be
locked in. A person approaching the
outside of the locked vehicle without
an authorized keyless access
transmitter will not be able to open
the door, even with the transmitter in
the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-6
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keyless Liftgate Opening
Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter (Keyless Access
Vehicles Only)
Press the touch pad on the liftgate
handle to open the liftgate if the
keyless entry transmitter is within
range.
A new transmitter can be
programmed to the vehicle when
there is one recognized transmitter.
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
To program, the vehicle must be off
and all of the transmitters, both
currently recognized and new, must
be with you.
Only keyless entry transmitters
programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or
stolen, a replacement can be
purchased and programmed through
your dealer/retailer. The vehicle can
be reprogrammed so that lost or
stolen transmitters no longer work.
Each vehicle can have up to
1. Place the recognized
transmitter(s) in the cupholder.
3. Place the new transmitter into
the transmitter pocket. The
transmitter pocket is inside the
center console storage area
located between the driver and
front passenger seats. The
storage area will need to be
opened and the storage tray
lifted up to access the
2. Insert the vehicle key of the new
transmitter into the key lock
cylinder located on the outside
of the driver door and turn the
key to the unlock position
eight transmitters matched to it.
five times within ten seconds.
The Driver Information Center
(DIC) displays “Ready To Learn
Electronic Key #2, 3, 4, etc”.
transmitter pocket.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-7
4. Press the ignition. When the
transmitter is learned the DIC
display will show that it is ready
to program the next transmitter.
Programming without a
Recognized Transmitter
(Keyless Access Vehicles Only)
2. Wait for ten minutes until the
DIC displays “Press Engine Start
Button To Learn” and then press
the ignition.
If there are no currently recognized
transmitters available, follow
this procedure to program up to
eight transmitters. This feature
is not available in Canada. This
procedure will take approximately
30 minutes to complete. The
vehicle must be off and all of the
transmitters you wish to program
must be with you.
5. Remove the transmitter from
the transmitter pocket and
The DIC displays will again
show “Remote Learn Pending,
Please Wait”.
press K on the transmitter.
3. Repeat Step 2 two additional
times. After the third time all
previously known transmitters
will no longer work with the
vehicle. Remaining transmitters
can be relearned during the next
steps.
To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 3
through 5.
When all additional transmitters
are programmed, press and hold
the ignition for 5 seconds to exit
programming mode.
1. Insert the vehicle key of the
transmitter into the key lock
cylinder located on the outside
of the driver door and turn the
key to the unlock position
The DIC display should now
show “Ready For Remote # 1”.
five times within ten seconds.
The Driver Information Center
(DIC) displays “Remote Learn
Pending, Please Wait”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-8
Keys, Doors and Windows
6. Remove the transmitter from
To start the vehicle:
the transmitter pocket and
1. Open the center console storage
area and the storage tray.
press K on the transmitter.
To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 4
through 6.
When all additional transmitters
are programmed, press and hold
the ignition for 5 seconds to exit
programming mode.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery
4. Place the new transmitter into
the transmitter pocket. The
transmitter pocket is inside the
center console storage area
located between the driver
and front passenger seats.
The storage area will need to
be opened and the storage
tray lifted up to access the
transmitter pocket.
If the transmitter battery is weak,
the DIC may display “No Remote
Detected” when you try to start the
vehicle. The “Replace Battery in
Remote Key” message may also
be displayed at this time.
2. Place the transmitter in the
transmitter pocket.
3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or
N (Neutral), press the brake
pedal and the START button.
Replace the transmitter battery
as soon as possible.
5. Press the ignition. When the
transmitter is learned the DIC
display will show that it is ready
to program the next transmitter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Remote Vehicle Start
1-9
Battery Replacement
Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of the
circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the
transmitter.
If available, this feature allows you
to start the engine from outside the
vehicle.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if the vehicle has remote
start.
Replace the battery if the “Replace
Battery in Remote Key” message
displays in the DIC. See “Replace
Battery in Remote Key” under Key
and Lock Messages on page 4‑37.
To enable and disable remote start,
see “Remote Vehicle Start” under
Vehicle Personalization on
2. Use the key blade to separate
the two halves of the transmitter.
1. Press the button near the bottom
of the transmitter and pull the
key out.
page 4‑41
.
Vehicles with an automatic climate
control system will automatically
change to a heating or cooling
mode depending on the outside
temperature during a remote start.
When the ON/RUN/START ignition
mode is selected , the climate
control system will return to its
setting from when the vehicle was
last turned off.
3. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
4. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing down. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
5. Snap the transmitter back
together.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-10
Keys, Doors and Windows
Laws in some local communities
may restrict the use of remote
starters. For example, some laws
may require a person using remote
start to have the vehicle in view.
Check local regulations for any
requirements.
During the remote start the
vehicle's doors will be locked
and the parking lamps will
remain on as long as the engine
is running.
A maximum of two remote starts or
remote start attempts are allowed
between ignition cycles.
The vehicle's ignition must be
changed to ON/RUN/START and
then back to OFF before the remote
start procedure can be used again.
3. Press the brake pedal and select
the ON/RUN/START ignition
mode to drive the vehicle.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑3
for additional information.
Shutting the Engine Off After a
Remote Start
The engine will shut off after
10 minutes unless a time
extension is done or the ignition
is put in ON/RUN/START.
To cancel a remote start:
.
Press / until the parking lamps
Starting the Engine Using Remote
Start
turn off.
Extending Engine Run Time
.
Turn on the hazard warning
For a 10 minute extension, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is
still running. The remote start can
only be extended once.
To start the engine using the remote
start feature:
flashers.
.
Turn the ignition on and then
back off.
1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.
When the remote start is extended,
the second 10 minute period will
start immediately.
2. Within three seconds, press and
Conditions in Which Remote Start
Will Not Work
hold / until the turn signal
lamps flash. This confirms the
request to remote start the
vehicle has been received. If the
vehicle' s lamps are not visible,
The remote start will not operate if:
For example, if the vehicle has
been running for five minutes, and
10 minutes are added, the engine
will run for a total of 15 minutes.
.
The ignition is in any mode other
than OFF.
.
The transmitter is in the vehicle.
press and hold / for at least
two seconds.
.
The hood is not closed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-11
.
.
.
The hazard warning flashers
are on.
From inside the vehicle with the
doors locked, pull once on the
door handle to unlock it, and a
second time to open it.
WARNING (Continued)
There is an emission control
system malfunction.
So, all passengers should
wear safety belts properly
and the doors should be
locked whenever the vehicle
is driven.
The engine coolant temperature
is too high.
Power Door Locks
.
.
The oil pressure is low.
.
Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
Two remote vehicle starts have
already been used.
.
The vehicle is not in P (Park).
Door Locks
WARNING
{
.
Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this
from happening.
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.
The power door lock switches are
located on the instrument panel.
Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash is increased if the
doors are not locked.
K (Unlock): Press (A) to unlock
the doors.
To lock or unlock a door, use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter from the outside.
Q (Lock): Press (B) to lock the
doors.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-12
Keys, Doors and Windows
Lockout Deterrent
Delayed Locking
Safety Locks
Lockout deterrent decreases the
chances that the keys may be
accidentally locked in the vehicle.
When this feature is enabled and
the doors are locked with the power
lock switch on the instrument panel,
three chimes sound to signal that
the delayed locking feature is in
use. All doors lock five seconds
after the last door is closed.
When door locking is requested
by pressing Q on the instrument
panel or Q on the keyless access
transmitter and the driver door is
open, all doors will lock and the
driver door will immediately unlock.
The driver door must be closed
When the delayed locking feature
is in use, pressing Q on the
instrument panel or Q on the
keyless access transmitter will
override the feature and lock all
doors immediately.
when Q is pressed for all doors to
remain locked.
Rear door security locks prevent
passengers from opening the rear
doors from the inside.
This feature can be programmed
to provide the lockout deterrent
feature only when the ignition
mode is ACC/ACCESSORY, or
ON/RUN/START. See “Power Door
Locks” in Vehicle Personalization on
This feature can be programmed by
using the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See “Delayed Door Lock”
in Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑41. The delayed locking
feature is only available if “Unlocked
Door Anti-Lockout” is disabled.
Press the button (C) to activate the
safety locks. Once activated, the
LED light in the switch illuminates.
page 4‑41
.
Pressing the button again
deactivates the safety locks.
See Power Door Locks on
page 1‑11
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-13
Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead
obstructions such as a garage
door, you could damage the
liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the
area above and behind the liftgate
is clear before opening it.
Doors
WARNING (Continued)
Liftgate (Manual)
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
WARNING
{
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
For vehicles without keyless access,
unlock the vehicle before opening
the liftgate.
.
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
Press the touchpad located in the
handle of the liftgate, above the
license plate, and lift up to open.
Do not press the touchpad while
closing the liftgate. This will cause
the liftgate to be unlatched.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
(Continued)
power liftgate function.
Always close the liftgate before
driving.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑22.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-14
Keys, Doors and Windows
Liftgate (Power)
WARNING (Continued)
Power Liftgate Operation
.
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air
and set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
WARNING
{
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
On vehicles with a power liftgate the
switch is located on the driver door.
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to
use the power feature. The taillamps
flash when the power liftgate
moves.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑22.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
.
Close all of the windows.
WARNING
{
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
You or others could be injured if
caught in the path of the power
liftgate. Make sure there is no one
in the way of the liftgate as it is
opening and closing.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-15
Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead
obstructions such as a garage
door, you could damage the
liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the
area above and behind the liftgate
is clear before opening it.
OFF: The liftgate only operates
manually in this position.
Manual operation of a liftgate that
also has power operation requires
more effort than with a standard
manual liftgate.
In either the MAX or the 3/4 mode,
the liftgate can be power opened
and closed by:
Choose the power liftgate mode by
turning the dial on the switch until
the indicator lines up with the
desired position.
.
Pressing & on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
until the liftgate starts moving.
See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on
Press and release & on the
liftgate adjacent to the latch to close
the liftgate.
The three modes are:
MAX : The liftgate power opens to
the full open height.
page 1‑3
.
Pressing any liftgate button, or the
touchpad switch while the liftgate is
moving, stops it. Pressing the button
or RKE switch again reverses the
direction. There is a minimum
distance that the power liftgate must
already be open for the system to
hold it open. If movement is stopped
below that minimum, the liftgate
closes.
3/4 : The liftgate power opens to a
reduced open height that can be set
by the vehicle operator in a range of
approximately 3/4 open to full open.
Use this setting to prevent the
liftgate from opening into overhead
obstructions such as a garage door
or roof mounted cargo during power
operation. The liftgate can still be
opened fully manually.
.
.
Pressing & on the center of
the mode switch, located on the
driver door.
Pressing the touchpad switch on
the liftgate outside handle to
open the liftgate.
Do not force the liftgate open or
closed during a power cycle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-16
Keys, Doors and Windows
The power liftgate may be
temporarily disabled under
extreme temperatures or low
battery conditions. If this occurs,
the liftgate can still be operated
manually.
Obstacle Detection Features
Setting the Power Liftgate
3/4 Mode
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle
during a power open or close cycle,
a warning chime will sound and
the liftgate will automatically reverse
direction to the full closed or
open position. After removing the
obstruction, the power liftgate
operation can be used again.
If the liftgate encounters multiple
obstacles on the same power cycle,
the power function will deactivate.
The Power Liftgate Unavailable
warning message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will
To change the liftgate stop position:
1. Turn the liftgate switch to either
the MAX, or the 3/4 mode
position and power open the
liftgate.
If you shift the transmission out of
P (Park) while the power function
is in progress, the liftgate power
function will continue to completion.
If you shift the transmission out of
P (Park) and accelerate before the
power liftgate latch is closed, the
liftgate may reverse to the open
position. Cargo could fall out of the
vehicle. Always make sure the
power liftgate is closed and latched
before you drive away.
2. Stop the liftgate movement at
the desired height by pressing
any liftgate switch. Manually
adjust the liftgate position if
required.
3. Press and hold the button on the
liftgate adjacent to the latch until
the turn signals flash and a beep
sounds to indicate that the new
setting is recorded.
display. After removing the
obstructions, the liftgate will
resume normal power operation.
If you power open the liftgate and
the liftgate support struts have lost
pressure, the turn signals flash
and a chime sounds. The liftgate
stays open temporarily, then slowly
closes. See your dealer/retailer for
service before using the liftgate.
The vehicle has pinch sensors
located on the side edges of the
liftgate. If an object is caught
between the liftgate and the body
and presses against this sensor, the
liftgate will reverse direction and
open fully. The liftgate will remain
open until it is activated again or
closed manually.
When power opened with the
3/4 mode selected, the liftgate stops
at the new set position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-17
If you do not hear the audible and
visual feedback when setting the
intermediate stop position, you are
attempting to set the height below
the 3/4 open height minimum
(approximately 5 feet). The liftgate
cannot be set below that minimum
and the new setting will not be
recorded.
To open the liftgate, press the
touchpad on the handle on the
outside of the liftgate, and lift the
gate open. To close the liftgate, use
the pull cup to lower the liftgate
and close. With the power liftgate
disabled, the liftgate electric latch
will still power latch once contact is
made with the striker. Always close
the liftgate before driving.
Vehicle Security
Vehicle theft is big business,
especially in some cities. This
vehicle has theft-deterrent features,
however, they do not make it
impossible to steal.
Anti-Theft Alarm System
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
system.
Manual Operation of Power
Liftgate
If the RKE button is pressed while
power operation is disabled, the turn
signals flash and the liftgate will
not move.
The LED light, located on the
instrument panel near the
windshield, indicates the status
of the system.
To change the liftgate to manual
operation, turn the mode switch to
the OFF position.
The liftgate has an electric latch.
If the battery is disconnected or has
low voltage, the liftgate will not
open. The liftgate will resume
operation when the battery is
reconnected and charged.
With the power liftgate disabled
and all of the doors unlocked, the
liftgate can be manually opened and
closed. Manual efforts of a vehicle
equipped with a power liftgate will
be higher than a standard
Arming the System
To arm the system,
1. Close all doors, liftgate
and hood.
non-power liftgate.
2. Lock the vehicle using the
transmitter. The LED on the
instrument panel should come
on and stay on for about
30 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-18
Keys, Doors and Windows
3. After 30 seconds, the alarm
system will arm, and the LED
will begin to slowly flash
If you set off the alarm by accident,
turn off the alarm by pressing the
unlock button on the transmitter.
The alarm will not stop if you try to
unlock a door any other way.
Disarming the System
To disarm the system, either unlock
the doors using the transmitter,
or start the vehicle with a
recognized transmitter in the
vehicle.
indicating the alarm is operating.
If a door, the hood, or liftgate is
opened without first unlocking with
the transmitter, the vehicle’s turn
signals will flash and the horn will
sound for about 30 seconds. The
alarm system will then re-arm to
monitor for the next unauthorized
event.
How to Detect a Tamper
Condition
To avoid setting off the alarm by
accident:
If K is pressed and the horn chirps
three times, an attempted break-in
has occurred while the system was
armed.
.
Lock the vehicle with the
transmitter after all occupants
have left the vehicle and all
doors are closed.
The theft-deterrent alarm system will
not activate if the doors are locked
with the vehicle's key or the manual
door lock. You can start the vehicle
with a recognized transmitter in the
vehicle if the alarm has been set off.
If the alarm has been activated, the
“Theft Attempted” message will
appear on the DIC. See Key and
Lock Messages on page 4‑37 for
additional information.
.
Always unlock a door with the
transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will not disarm the
alarm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-19
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑19 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
The security light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
if there is a problem with arming
or disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
If the vehicle will not change
ignition modes (ACC/ACCESSORY,
ON/RUN/START, OFF), and the
keyless entry transmitter appears to
be undamaged, try another keyless
entry transmitter. Or, you may try
placing the transmitter in the
transmitter pocket located in the
center console. See “No Remote
Detected” under Key and Lock
Messages on page 4‑37.
Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
The system has one or more
keyless entry transmitters that are
matched to an immobilizer control
unit in your vehicle. Only a correctly
matched keyless entry transmitter
will start the vehicle. If the keyless
entry transmitter is ever damaged,
you may not be able to start your
vehicle.
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the vehicle is
turned off.
The immobilization system is
disarmed when the pushbutton
start is activated to enter the
ACC/ACCESSORY mode or the
ON/RUN/START mode and a valid
transmitter is present in the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-20
Keys, Doors and Windows
If the ignition modes will not change
with the other transmitter, your
vehicle needs service. If the ignition
does change modes, the first
Power Mirrors
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
transmitter may be faulty. See your
dealer/retailer who can service the
theft-deterrent system and have a
new keyless entry transmitter
WARNING
{
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
programmed to the vehicle.
It is possible for the immobilizer
system to learn new or replacement
keyless entry transmitters. Up to
eight keyless entry transmitters can
be programmed for the vehicle. To
program additional transmitters, see
“Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle” Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are located on the
driver door.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
To adjust the mirror:
page 1‑3
.
1. Move the selector switch to
L (left) or R (right) to choose the
driver or passenger mirror.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
2. Press the arrows on the control
pad to move each mirror to the
desired direction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-21
3. Adjust each outside mirror so
that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen.
Power Foldaway Mirrors
Resetting the Power Foldaway
Mirrors
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:
4. Return the selector switch to the
center position.
.
The mirrors are accidentally
obstructed while folding.
.
They are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
Folding Mirrors
Manual Foldaway Mirrors
.
The mirrors do not stay in the
Vehicles with manual fold mirrors
are folded inward toward the vehicle
to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
Push the mirror outward to return it
to the original position.
unfolded position.
.
The mirrors vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time
using the mirror controls to reset
them to their normal position.
A noise may be heard during the
resetting of the power foldaway
mirrors. This sound is normal after a
manual folding operation.
Vehicles with power folding mirrors
have controls located on the
driver door.
To fold the mirrors:
1. With the selector switch in
the O position, push the control
pad down. Both mirrors will
automatically fold.
2. Press the selector switch again
to return the mirrors to their
original position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-22
Keys, Doors and Windows
Heated Mirrors
Park Tilt Mirrors
Interior Mirrors
< (Rear Window Defogger):
If the vehicle has the memory
package, the outside mirrors have
a park tilt feature. This feature
autiomatically tilts the outside
mirrors to a preselected position
when the vehicle is in R (Reverse).
This allows the driver to view the
curb for parallel parking.
Manual Rearview Mirror
Press to heat the mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 7‑1 for more
information.
Adjust the inside rearview mirror
by moving it up and down or
side-to-side for a clearer view
behind the vehicle.
Vehicles with OnStar® have
three additional control buttons
located at the bottom of the mirror.
See your dealer/retailer for more
information on the system and how
to subscribe to OnStar. See the
OnStar® owner guide for more
information about the services
OnStar provides.
Automatic Dimming
Mirror
The passenger and driver mirrors
return to their original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of
R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned
off or to OFF/LOCK.
If the vehicle has the automatic
dimming mirror, the driver outside
mirror automatically adjusts for the
glare of headlamps behind you. This
feature is controlled by the on and
off setting on the inside rearview
mirror. See Manual Rearview Mirror
on page 1‑22 for more information.
This feature can be turned on or
off through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑41
for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-23
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
Windows
WARNING
{
The vehicle may have an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare from the headlamps of the
vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature comes on and the indicator
light illuminates each time the
vehicle is started.
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by
the extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Vehicles with OnStar have
three additional control buttons
located at the bottom of the mirror.
See your dealer/retailer for more
information on the system and how
to subscribe to OnStar. See the
OnStar® owner's guide for more
information about the services
OnStar provides.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-24
Keys, Doors and Windows
The power windows:
Power Windows
.
Can be operated with the
ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN/START.
WARNING
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keyless access transmitter
is dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the
vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keyless access
transmitter in the vehicle and they
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keyless
access transmitter in a vehicle
with children.
.
Can be operated within
10 minutes of switching the
ignition off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 8‑18
.
.
Will stop operation when any
door is opened.
Driver side shown
Operate the switch for the desired
window by pressing to open and
pulling to close.
The power window controls are
located on each of the side doors.
Pushing or pulling the switch part
of the way will open or close the
window as long as the switch is
operated.
The driver door also has switches
that control the passenger and rear
windows.
When there are children in the
rear seat use the window lockout
button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-25
If the window will not express up
after power has been restored and a
message is displayed in the Driver
Information Center:
If there is something blocking the
window during automatic closing,
the window will reverse direction
for a short distance. Weather
conditions such as extreme cold
and/or ice may cause the window to
auto-reverse. The window will return
to normal operation once the object
or condition is removed.
Express‐Down/Up Windows
Windows that have the
express‐down/up feature allow
the windows to be lowered and
raised fully without holding the
window switch. Press the window
switch fully and release it to activate
the express‐down feature. Pull the
window switch fully up and release
it to activate the express‐up
1. Close all doors
2. Place the ignition in
ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN/START.
3. From any partial open position,
close the window and continue
to press the switch briefly after
the window has fully closed.
If conditions prevent the window
from closing and the window
continues to auto-reverse, it is
possible to close the window with
the ignition in ON/RUN/START by
holding the window switch in the
partially or fully pulled up position.
Release of the switch from the
partially pulled up position will cause
the window to stop. Release of the
switch from the fully pulled up
position will activate the express-up
and related obstacle detection
features.
feature.The express mode can be
canceled at any time by briefly
pressing, or pulling the switch.
Obstacle Detection Feature
Programming the Power
Windows
The Obstacle Detection Feature is
part of the express-up feature and is
active:
Programming the power windows
may be necessary if the vehicle's
battery has been disconnected or
discharged.
1. In the middle and upper portions
of the window opening.
2. During window up movements.
3. In ignition OFF during all window
up movements and during
express-up window movements
in ignition ON/RUN/START.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-26
Keys, Doors and Windows
Overload
Window Lockout
Roof
If the windows are repeatedly
operated within a short time, the
window operation is disabled for a
short time.
o (Window Lockout): The window
lockout switch is located on the
driver door. This feature prevents
the rear passenger windows from
operating, except from the driver
position. Press the switch to turn
the lockout feature on or off. An
indicator light shows the feature
is on.
Sunroof
On vehicles with a sunroof, the
switches are located on the
headliner above the rearview
mirror. The ignition must
be in ON/RUN/START,
ACC/ACCESSORY, or in
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
to operate the sunroof. See Ignition
Positions on page 8‑17 and
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Opening the Windows From
Outside the Vehicle
Sun Visors
Pull the sun visor down to block
glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount and slide it along the
rod from side-to-side to cover the
driver or passenger side of the front
window. Swing the sun visor to the
side to cover the side window.
on page 8‑18
.
It can be moved along the rod from
side-to-side in this position also.
The vehicle may have remote
operating windows that can be
opened from outside the vehicle by
pressing and holding the unlock
button on the Keyless Access
Transmitter to open all the windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
1-27
Press the switch to the second stop
again to open the glass further, up
to the full open position. If more
venting is needed when the sunroof
is open, adjust the sunroof to the
comfort position or open one of the
windows slightly.
Press the back of the sunshade
switch (B) to open the sunshade.
Press the front of the switch to the
first stop to close the sunshade to a
desired position at a normal speed.
Press the switch forward to the
second stop to express close the
sunshade.
Press the front of the switch to close
the sunroof. The first stop will close
the sunroof at a desired position at
normal speed, and the second stop
will express close the roof.
Fully close the glass before fully
closing the sunshade.
Express-open/Express-close
A. Sunroof Switch
Press and release the front or
rear of the sunroof switch (A) to
express-open or express-close the
sunroof.
Do not keep the sunroof open for
long periods of time while the
vehicle is not in use. Excessive
debris may collect in the tracks and
possibly plug the water draining
system.
B. Sunshade Switch
Press the back of the sunroof
switch (A) to open the sunroof.
When the switch is pressed to the
first stop the sunroof will open to
the vent position. Press the switch
to the second stop to express open
the sunroof to an automatically
adjusted comfort position.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof when it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature detects the object
and stops the sunroof from closing
at the point of the obstruction. The
sunroof then returns to the full-open
position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-28
Keys, Doors and Windows
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-1
Passenger Sensing
Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
How to Wear Safety Belts
Seats and
Restraints
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 2-41
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 2-42
Replacing Airbag System
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 2-26
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Seats
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 2-4
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . 2-6
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Heated and Ventilated Front
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 2-48
Where to Put the Restraint . . . 2-50
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Replacing LATCH System
Airbag System
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 2-30
When Should an Airbag
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Rear Seats
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Rear Seat
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Securing Child Restraints
Pass-Through Door . . . . . . . . 2-12
(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2
Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
Front Seats
WARNING
{
With head restraints that are
not installed and adjusted
The vehicle's front seats have
adjustable head restraints in all
outboard seating positions.
properly, there is a greater
chance that occupants will suffer
a neck/spinal injury in a crash.
Do not drive until the head
restraints for all occupants are
installed and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-3
3. Release the button.
Rear Seats
4. Push down on the head restraint
to make sure it is locked in
place.
The rear seats have adjustable
head restraints in the outboard
seating positions.
1. To raise or lower the head
restraint, press the release
button while pulling up or
pushing down on the head
restraint.
2. Release the button then pull up
or push down on the head
restraint to make sure it is
locked in place.
1. Pull the head restraint up to
raise it.
The center seating position has an
integrated head rest that can be
adjusted the same way as the head
restraints.
2. To lower the head restraint,
press the release button while
pushing the head restraint down.
The head restraints and head rest
are not designed to be removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4
Seats and Restraints
Power Seat Adjustment
Front Seats
WARNING (Continued)
Seat Adjustment
The sudden movement could
startle and confuse you, or make
you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver's
seat only when the vehicle is not
moving.
To adjust the seat position:
1. Pull the handle located at the
front of the seat.
2. Move the seat forward or
backward to adjust the seat
position.
Driver Seat shown
A. Power Seat Adjustment
B. Seatback Adjustment
C. Lumbar Adjustment
3. Release the handle to stop the
seat from moving.
WARNING
{
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver's seat while
the vehicle is moving.
On vehicles with power seats, the
controls are located on the outboard
side of the seats.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-5
Adjust the power seat by moving
the control (A) forward or rearward.
The front or rear of the seat can be
adjusted up or down by moving the
front or rear of the control up
and down.
To save:
Entering the vehicle using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
1. Adjust the driver seat, including
the seatback recliner, both
outside mirrors, and pedals,
if available.
transmitter with the remote recall
feature activated in Vehicle
Personalization automatically
adjusts the seat, mirrors and pedals,
if available. There is no adjustment
when the position has not been
changed by another seating
position.
2. Press and hold the MEM button
and button 1 at the same time.
One beep indicates the position
is stored.
Adjust the seatback by moving the
control (B) forward or rearward.
Adjust the lumbar support by
using the control (C). See Lumbar
Adjustment on page 2‑6 for more
information.
Repeat for a second memory setting
while pressing button 2.
When the remote recall feature is
on, the seat, mirror and pedal
position, if available, will be stored
when the ignition is turned to OFF.
It is stored according to the RKE
transmitter used to start the vehicle.
To recall the memory positions,
press and hold either button 1 or
button 2 corresponding to the
desired driving position. The seat,
outside mirrors and pedals,
if available, move to the stored
position . Releasing the button
before the stored position is
reached cancels the recall.
Memory Seats
To stop recall movement of the RKE
remote recall feature, press one of
the power seat controls, memory
buttons, or power mirror buttons.
The vehicle may have a memory
seat allowing saved and recalled
seat settings. Controls are located
on the outboard side of the seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6
Seats and Restraints
Memory Seat recall may stop if
the seat is blocked. Remove the
obstruction and then press the
memory button again. If the memory
function does not work properly, see
your dealer/retailer for service.
Lumbar Adjustment
Thigh Support
Adjustment
Power Lumbar
Easy Exit Seat
If the easy exit seat feature is on in
Vehicle Personalization, automatic
adjustment occurs when the ignition
is turned to OFF and the driver
door is opened. The driver seat
moves back.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑41 for more information.
On vehicles with this feature, adjust
the manual leg extension by pulling
up on the lever, pulling or pushing
on the support to lengthen or
shorten it. Release the lever to lock
it in place.
Seats with power lumbar have
controls located on the outboard
side of the seats. See Power Seat
Adjustment on page 2‑4 for more
information.
Adjust lumbar support by using the
rocker switch on the outboard side
of the driver seat.
Release the switch when the
seatback reaches the desired level
of lumbar support.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-7
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING
{
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
WARNING
{
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver's seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Vehicles with manual reclining
seatbacks have a lever on the
outboard side of the seat. Lift the
lever and move the seatback to the
desired position, then release the
lever. The seatback should not
move when pushed or pulled.
On vehicles with power reclining
seatbacks, the switch is located
on the outboard side of the seat.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 2‑4 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-8
Seats and Restraints
Move the switch forward or rearward
to adjust the seatback.
Heated Front Seats
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
{
WARNING
{
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
cover or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at
your pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may
damage the seat.
Do not have a seatback reclined if
your vehicle is moving.
On vehicles with heated front seats,
the controls are located on the
center console. To operate the
heated seats the ignition must be in
ON/RUN/START.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-9
will heat to the highest setting if it is
cold outside. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 1‑9.
Heated and Ventilated
Front Seats
WARNING
{
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
cover or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to
On vehicles with the heated and
Press the button M to heat the seat
cushion and seatback.
ventilated seat feature, the controls
are located on the center console.
To operate the heated and
ventilated seats the ignition must
be in ON/RUN/START.
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the switch, the heated seat will
change to the next lower setting,
and then the off setting. The lights
indicate three for the highest setting
and one for the lowest.
Press M to heat the seat and { to
cool the seat to the maximum
setting.
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may
damage the seat.
When Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is used to remote start
the vehicle, the front heated seats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10
Seats and Restraints
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then the
off setting. The lights indicate three
for the highest setting and one for
the lowest.
Rear Seats
Split Folding Seatbacks
WARNING (Continued)
After raising the rear seatback,
always check to be sure that the
safety belts are properly routed
and attached, and are not twisted.
With this feature, either side of the
rear seatback can be folded down
for more cargo space.
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
To Fold the Seatback Down:
WARNING
{
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
When Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is used to remote start
the vehicle, the front seats will come
on at the highest setting if it is cold
or hot outside. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 1‑9.
The heated and ventilated seats will
be canceled after the ignition is
turned off. Press the button again to
use the heated or ventilated seat
feature after the vehicle is started.
1. The rear safety belts must be
unbuckled and the front
seatbacks are not reclined.
WARNING
{
2. Make sure that there is nothing
under, in front of, or on the seat.
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
To Recline the Seatback:
2-11
To Raise the Seatback:
1. Lift the lever located on top
of the seatback. Raise the
seatback and release the lever.
The rear seat lock indicator (A)
extends when the seatback is
unlocked.
1. Lift and hold the lever located on
top of the seatback. The rear
seat lock indicator (A) extends
when the seatback is unlocked.
2. Tilt the seatback rearward, then
release the lever when the
seatback is in the desired
position. The rear seat lock
indicator (A) retracts when the
seatback is locked.
2. Tilt the seatback rearward until
it locks in the upright position.
The rear seat lock indicator (A)
retracts when the seatback is
locked.
3. Lift the lever located on the top
of the seatback. The rear seat
lock indicator (A) extends when
the seatback is unlocked.
4. Fold the seatback forward. The
rear seat lock indicator (A)
retracts when the seatback is
locked.
Keep the seat in the upright locked
position when not in use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-12
Seats and Restraints
Heated Rear Seats
Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door
WARNING
{
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
cover or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to
With the ignition in ON/RUN/START,
press either button L for the
corresponding seat. The LED light
illuminates when the feature is on.
The vehicle may have a rear seat
pass-through door located in the
center of the rear seatback. Fold
down the center armrest and push
down on the latch to open the door.
Only the outboard seats are heated.
overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may
damage the seat.
An indicator on the RSA screen
turns on and the seat cushion and
seatback heat up. With each press
of the switch the heated seat
changes to the next lower setting
and then off. The bars indicate
three for the highest setting and
one for the lowest.
On vehicles with heated rear seats,
the switches are located on the
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) controls.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-13
In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
safety belts. Here is why:
Safety Belts
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.
WARNING
{
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that
is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
You never know if you will be in
a crash. If you do have a crash,
you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
WARNING
{
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
Do not let anyone ride where a
safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, the injuries can be
much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be
ejected from the vehicle. You
and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 4‑17 for additional
information.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
restrained properly too.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14
Seats and Restraints
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the
vehicle. The rider does not stop.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it is just a seat on wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-15
The person keeps going until
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
With safety belts, you slow down
as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-16
Seats and Restraints
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
Q: If I am a good driver, and I
never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
belts?
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even
one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does
not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not. But
your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety
belt, even if you are
Most accidents occur within
40 km (25 miles) of home.
And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths
occur at speeds of less than
65 km/h (40 mph).
upside down.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-17
First, before you or your
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information you
should know.
In a crash, this applies force to the
strong pelvic bones and you would
be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety belts
and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and
infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on
page 2‑43 or Infants and Young
Children on page 2‑45. Follow
those rules for everyone's
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Sit up straight and always keep
your feet on the floor in front of
you. The lap part of the belt
should be worn low and snug on
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
the hips, just touching the thighs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-18
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
{
You can be seriously hurt if your
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching
the thighs.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
not give nearly as much
protection this way.
protection this way.
WARNING
{
You can be seriously hurt if your
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
{
You can be seriously injured if
your belt is buckled in the wrong
place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there,
not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
A: The belt is over an armrest.
buckle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-20
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
You can be seriously injured if
your belt goes over an armrest
like this. The belt would be much
too high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the
belt would apply too much force
to the ribs, which are not as
strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the
chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
{
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too
far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
A: The belt is twisted across
the body.
WARNING
{
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-22
Seats and Restraints
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
See “Shoulder Belt Height
Adjustment” later in this section
for instructions on use and
important safety information.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 2‑26
.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
If the shoulder portion of a
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
passenger belt is pulled out
all the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-23
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
Adjust the height so that the
shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on the shoulder. The belt
should be away from the face and
neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height
adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a
crash.
To unlatch the belt, just push the
button on the buckle. For outboard
seating positions, slide the latch
plate up the safety belt webbing
when the safety belt is not in use.
The latch plate should rest on the
stitching on the safety belt, near the
guide loop.
Move the height adjuster up to the
desired position by pushing up on
the height adjuster.
After the height adjuster is set to the
desired position, try to move it up or
down without pressing the release
button (A) to make sure it has
locked into position. Press the
release button to lower the height
adjuster.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-24
Seats and Restraints
Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
This vehicle has safety belt
1. Remove the guide from its
storage pocket on the side of
the seat.
pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and
near frontal crash and will deploy in
side, rear and rollover events if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner
activation are met.
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides for the outboard
passenger positions in the rear seat.
If not, they are available through
your dealer/retailer. The guides
may provide added safety belt
comfort for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, and properly adjusted,
the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the
vehicle's safety belt system. See
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
After a Crash on page 2‑27.
2. Place the guide over the belt,
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-25
WARNING
{
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not
twisted and it lies flat. The
elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
4. Buckle, position, and release
the safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
sure that the shoulder belt
crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Slide
the guide back into its storage
pocket located on the side of
the seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-26
Seats and Restraints
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
Safety System Check
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working
properly. Look for any other loose
or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt
system from doing its job. See your
dealer/retailer to have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not
protect you in a crash. They can rip
apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one
right away.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer/retailer will
order you an extender. When you
go in to order it, take the heaviest
coat you will wear, so the extender
will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let
someone else use it, and use it only
for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for
adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, attach it to
the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction
sheet that comes with the extender.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 4‑17 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on
A pregnant woman should wear
a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
page 2‑27
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-27
Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following
airbags:
WARNING (Continued)
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
WARNING
{
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
.
.
.
A frontal airbag for the right front
passenger.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer/retailer to have the
safety belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front
passenger.
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash
.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
A roof-rail airbag for the right
front passenger and the
WARNING
{
passenger seated directly
behind the right front passenger.
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑18.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure the
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-28
Seats and Restraints
For frontal airbags, the word
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
WARNING
{
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.
Be sure that cargo is not near an
airbag. In a crash, an inflating
airbag might force that object
toward a person. This could
cause severe injury or even
death. Secure objects away from
the area in which an airbag would
inflate. For more information, see
Where Are the Airbags? on
page 2‑30 and Vehicle Load
Limits on page 8‑11.
WARNING
{
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, but do not replace them.
Also, airbags are not designed to
deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑31.
With seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear along the trim.
Even if you do not have a right front
passenger seat in the vehicle there
is still an active frontal airbag in the
right side of the instrument panel.
Do not place cargo in front of this
airbag.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-29
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Airbags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge
of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 2‑43 or Infants
and Young Children on
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑18 for
more information.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
page 2‑45
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-30
Seats and Restraints
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger frontal
airbag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger side.
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
The driver frontal airbag is in the
middle of the steering wheel.
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-31
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
WARNING
{
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest.
However, they are only designed
to inflate if the impact exceeds
a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds
are used to predict how severe a
crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain
the occupants.
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, and second
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
Do not use seat accessories
that block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Whether the frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on
how fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how
quickly your vehicle slows down.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-32
Seats and Restraints
Frontal airbags may inflate at
different crash speeds. For
example:
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
during a rollover. Seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above
the system's designed threshold
level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
.
If the vehicle hits a stationary
In addition, the vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
object, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a moving object.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full
Seat-mounted side impact airbags
are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts,
rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail
airbags are not intended to inflate in
rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is
struck. Both roof-rail airbags will
deploy when either side of the
vehicle is struck, or if the sensing
system predicts that the vehicle is
about to roll over, or in a severe
frontal impact.
.
If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object
that does not deform.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object
(like a pole), the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).
deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags. See
.
If the vehicle goes into an object
Airbag System on page 2‑27
.
at an angle, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. In addition, these roof-rail
airbags are intended to inflate
If the vehicle does not have a right
front passenger seat and a rear
seat, only the driver frontal airbag
will deploy in a frontal impact.
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-33
In any particular crash, no one
can say whether an airbag should
have inflated simply because of
the damage to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
For seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and
severity of the side impact. In a
rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the
direction of the roll.
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Frontal
airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually.
Seat‐mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body.
Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags,
there are airbag modules in the side
of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-34
Seats and Restraints
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
are designed to help contain the
head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the
first and second rows. The rollover
capable roof-rail airbags are
designed to help reduce the risk of
full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can
prevent all such ejections.
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates?
WARNING
{
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑33.
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon
as it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
But airbags would not help in
many types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑31 for more information.
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn
on the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers, and shut off the
fuel system after the airbags inflate.
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out of
the windshield or being able to steer
the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-35
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 12‑18 and Event Data
Recorders on page 12‑18.
You can lock the doors, turn off the
interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers by using the controls for
those features.
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage
may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
WARNING
{
.
Airbags are designed to inflate
.
A crash severe enough to
inflate the airbags may have also
damaged important functions
in the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle.
Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some
new parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-36
Seats and Restraints
start the vehicle from a distance,
you may not see the system
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front
passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible
on the overhead console when the
vehicle is started.
check. When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 4‑19.
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including:
an infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
The passenger sensing system
turns off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags and
the roof-rail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of
the right front passenger seat. The
sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag and
seat‐mounted side impact airbag
should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, are visible
during the system check. If you are
using remote start, if equipped, to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-37
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger airbag and seat‐mounted
side impact airbag if:
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag(s) are off. If you secure
a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
.
The right front passenger seat is
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
unoccupied.
.
The system determines that an
infant is present in a rear-facing
infant seat.
.
The system determines that a
small child is present in a child
restraint.
If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat that will accommodate
a rear‐facing child restraint, a
rear‐facing child restraint should
not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
.
The system determines that a
small child is present in a
booster seat.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the
.
A right front passenger takes
his/her weight off of the seat for
right front passenger frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped), no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will
not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag(s) are off.
a period of time.
.
The right front passenger seat is
occupied by a smaller person,
such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-38
Seats and Restraints
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag and
seat‐mounted side impact airbag,
the off indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbags are
off. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑19.
For some children who have
If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint
outgrown child restraints and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in the
vehicle who has outgrown child
restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate)
the right front passenger frontal
airbag and seat‐mounted side
impact airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front
passenger seat.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions
WARNING
{
provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 4‑18 for more
information, including important
safety information.
When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbags to
be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the
airbags are active.
“Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position”
under Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat ) on page 2‑57 or
Securing Child Restraints (Front
Passenger Seat) on page 2‑59.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-39
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still
lit, turn the vehicle off. Then
slightly recline the vehicle
system to detect that person and
enable the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
seatback and adjust the seat
cushion, if adjustable, to make
sure that the vehicle seatback is
not pushing the child restraint
into the seat cushion.
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under
the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 2‑2
.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
the right front passenger seat, but
the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens,
use the following steps to allow the
6. Restart the vehicle.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If the on indicator is still lit,
secure the child restraint in
a rear seat position in the
vehicle, and check with your
dealer/retailer.
If no rear seat is available, do not
install a child restraint in this
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-40
Seats and Restraints
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
For up to 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off and the
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers
and braking, which helps the
passenger sensing system maintain
the passenger airbag status.
See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are parts
of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about
servicing the vehicle and the airbag
system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 12‑15.
A thick layer of additional
material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment
such as seat covers, seat heaters,
and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing
system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or
other aftermarket equipment
except when approved by GM
for your specific vehicle. See Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑41 for more
information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-41
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system
for the right front passenger
position, which includes sensors
that are part of the passenger
seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate
properly if the original seat
trim is replaced with non-GM
covers, upholstery or trim,
or with GM covers, upholstery
or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as
an aftermarket seat heater or
a comfort enhancing pad or
device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the
If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are
in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on
A: Yes. If you add things that
change the vehicle's frame,
bumper system, height, front end
or side sheet metal, they may
keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or
moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors,
rollover sensor module, airbag
wiring, or cargo restraint system
and convenience net can affect
the operation of the airbag
system.
page 12‑1
.
If the vehicle has rollover
roof-rail airbags, see Different
Size Tires and Wheels on
page 9‑70 for additional
important information.
passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 2‑36
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-42
Seats and Restraints
Q: Because I have a disability,
I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
Airbag System Check
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance or
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
WARNING
{
A: If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are
in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in
A crash can damage the
page 4‑18 for more information.
airbag systems in your vehicle.
A damaged airbag system may
not work properly and may
not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure your airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the
airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on
page 12‑1
.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and
the service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
Inflate? on page 2‑33. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-43
If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
your dealer/retailer for service.
that booster. Use a booster seat
with a lap-shoulder belt until the
child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
.
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly.
Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 2‑22 for more information.
If the shoulder belt still does not
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat.
on page 4‑18 for more information.
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle's safety belts.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat, state
the weight and height limitations for
.
Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-44
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
WARNING
{
page 2‑22
.
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Never do this.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the
two children can be crushed
together and seriously injured.
A safety belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-45
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Infants and Young
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants
and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-46
Seats and Restraints
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING (Continued)
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
will go.
WARNING
{
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be
WARNING
{
Never do this.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
secured in an appropriate
restraint.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-47
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
WARNING
{
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle's
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low
on the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
WARNING
{
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not
fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available.
When purchasing a child
restraint, be sure it is designed
to be used in a motor vehicle.
If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal
motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer's
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-48
Seats and Restraints
Child Restraint Systems
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
(C) Booster Seats
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child's
body with the harness.
A booster seat (C) is a child
(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
restraint designed to improve the fit
of the vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child
to see out the window.
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the seating
surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-49
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or
by the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 2‑52 for
more information. Children can be
endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle.
WARNING
{
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle's safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
WARNING
{
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child is
not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-50
Seats and Restraints
Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 2‑36 for additional
information.
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with your
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child
restraints not be transported in the
vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-51
Wherever you install a child
restraint, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Configurations for Use of Child
Restraints
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
A. Child restraint or occupant using
safety belt
A. Child restraint using LATCH
B. Occupant prohibited
If you need to secure more than
one child restraint in the rear seat,
review the following illustrations.
Depending on where you place
the child restraint or the size of
the child restraint, you may not be
able to access certain safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for
additional passengers or child
restraints.
A. Child restraint or occupant using
safety belt
B. Child restraint using LATCH
A. Child restraint using LATCH
B. Occupant prohibited
C. Child restraint or occupant using
safety belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-52
Seats and Restraints
In order to use the LATCH system
in your vehicle, you need a
seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint
with lower attachments (B).
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in
the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use
with the LATCH system.
child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the
child restraint and its attachments.
The following explains how to
attach a child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
Top Tether Anchor
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
Lower Anchors
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the
top of the child restraint to the
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are
two lower anchors for each LATCH
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-53
Your child restraint may have
a single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a
single attachment (B) to secure
the top tether to the anchor.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for your child
restraint.
To assist you in locating the lower
anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
Rear Seat
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
To assist you in locating the top
tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the cover.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-54
Seats and Restraints
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
WARNING (Continued)
safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with the child restraint
and the instructions in this
manual.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 2‑50 for
WARNING
{
additional information.
Do not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
Top Tether Anchors
The top tether anchors for each rear
seating position are located under
the covers, on the back of the rear
seatback. Be sure to use an anchor
located on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be
placed.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one
child restraint per anchor.
WARNING
{
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured
or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-55
Make sure to attach the child
restraint at the proper anchor
location.
Refer to your child restraint
manufacturer instructions and
the instructions in this manual.
WARNING
{
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint
so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
This system is designed to make
installation of child restraints easier.
When using lower anchors, do not
use the vehicle's safety belts.
Instead use the vehicle's anchors
and child restraint attachments
to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating
position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
attachments or the desired
seating position does not
have lower anchors, secure
the child restraint with the top
tether and the safety belts.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor
and open its cover to
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
expose the anchor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-56
Seats and Restraints
2.2. Route, attach and tighten
the top tether according
to your child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
If the rear outboard seating
position you are using
If the rear center seating
position you are using has
an adjustable headrest and
you are using a dual tether,
lower the headrest down
to its stowed position and
route the tether over the
headrest.
has an adjustable head
restraint and you are using
a single tether, raise the
head restraint and route
the tether under the head
restraint and in between the
head restraint posts.
If the rear outboard seating
position you are using
has an adjustable head
restraint and you are using
a dual tether, route the
tether around the head
restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-57
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints
Parts After a Crash
(Rear Seat )
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
WARNING
{
A crash can damage the
LATCH system in the vehicle.
A damaged LATCH system may
not properly secure the child
restraint, resulting in serious
injury or even death in a crash.
To help make sure the LATCH
system is working properly after a
crash, see your dealer/retailer to
have the system inspected and
any necessary replacements
made as soon as possible.
If the child restraint has the
LATCH system, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 2‑52 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint
is secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 2‑52 for top tether anchor
locations.
If the rear center seating
position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
and you are using a
single tether, lower the
headrest to its stowed
position and route the
tether over the headrest.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
3. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-58
Seats and Restraints
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 2‑50.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-59
6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 2‑52 for more
information.
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Passenger Seat)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See
Where to Put the Restraint on
page 2‑50
.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑36 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 4‑19 for more information,
including important safety
To remove the child restraint,
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-60
Seats and Restraints
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat that will accommodate
a rear‐facing child restraint, a
rear‐facing child restraint should
not be installed in the vehicle, even
if the airbag is off.
WARNING (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
WARNING
{
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 2‑52 for how
and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child
restraint is secured using a safety
belt and it uses a top tether, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 2‑52 for top tether anchor
locations.
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 2‑36 for additional
information.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
2-61
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and seat‐mounted side impact
airbag, the off indicator on
the passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay
lit when you start the vehicle.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑19.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle, so that the safety
belt could be quickly unbuckled
if necessary.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-62
Seats and Restraints
If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat and the child restraint
has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer's
instructions regrading the use
of the top tether. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see
“If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
System on page 2‑36 for more
information.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
Children (LATCH System) on
page 2‑52 for more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator will come on and
stay on when the vehicle is started.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
3-1
Cupholders
Storage
Compartments
Storage
Storage Compartments
Glove Box
Lift the glove box handle up to open
it. Use the key to lock and unlock
the glove box.
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 3-2
The glove box is air conditioned and
can be used to store items at a
lower temperature. The vehicle air
conditioning must be turned on for
the maximum cool air to enter the
glove box. Move the slide control
across the small hole to turn the
cool air flow off. Close the opening
to keep cold air from entering the
vehicle.
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Cargo Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Cargo Management
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
This vehicle has a cupholder
equipped with a divider that can be
adjusted to accommodate large
containers or small containers.
Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
For large containers, push the
button to move aside the divider
and make the cupholder deeper.
For small containers, push down on
the top edge of the divider to lock it
back in place to make the cupholder
shorter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2
Storage
There is an Accessory Power
Outlet (APO) and Input Jacks for
auxiliary audio devices. See
Auxiliary Devices under Audio
Players.
Front Storage
Center Console Storage
Vehicles have an armrest and an
upper storage tray in the center
console.
A storage area is located in front of
the shift lever. Push the top of the
door and the storage automatically
opens.
The armrest on top of the center
console can be adjusted to a
rearward, middle, and forward
position. Slide the top of the armrest
to adjust to the desired position.
Armrest Storage
For vehicles with a rear seat
armrest, pull the rear seat armrest
forward to access cupholders with
removable liners and a storage
area. Pull the lever to access the
storage area.
To open the center console with
armrest, move the armrest to the
full rearward position to access the
buttons.
For either center console, the
storage area has a storage tray and
a main storage. Push the driver side
button to access the storage tray.
Push the passenger side button to
access the main storage.
Push the button to open the storage
area located at the rear of the
center console.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
3-3
Additional Storage
Features
Cargo Cover
For vehicles with the dual position
cargo cover, it can be used to cover
items in the cargo area of the
vehicle.
Install the cargo cover
1. Hold the cartridge so that the
pull‐out shade faces the rear of
the vehicle.
2. Align the cartridge over the pins
on the trim panels of the vehicle.
5. The shade can be set in two
positions. It can be set in a
half way open (A) position for
loading objects into the rear
compartment.
3. Push down on the cartridge to
snap it into place.
4. Unroll the shade towards the
rear of the vehicle.
6. Pull cargo cover down to
lower (B) position to conceal
objects in the rear compartment.
7. Align the pins with the channels
on both sides.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4
Storage
Remove the cargo cover
WARNING
{
1. Remove the cover from the
channels and carefully roll it
back up.
An improperly stored cargo cover
could be thrown about the vehicle
during a collision or sudden
maneuver. Someone could be
injured. If the cover is removed,
always store it in the proper
storage location. When it is
replaced, always be sure that it
is securely reattached.
8. Insert the shades pin into the
bent slot (B) and slide it to the
first stop (C) to totally conceal
the cargo area. The shade can
also be positioned at second
stop (A) to partially cover cargo.
Cargo Tie Downs
For vehicles equipped with cargo
tie‐downs, the four tie-downs are
located in the rear compartment of
the vehicle. Use the tie-downs to
secure small loads.
2. Slide the button on the top to
release the cartridge.
3. Pull up to remove the cartridge
from the pins.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
3-5
Cargo Management
System
A prop rod locks to hold the cover
up when opened.
Press the red push button (B) on the
prop rod to close the cover.
Four hooks are located on the
inside cover and can be used or
storing items.
To open the cargo management
system, press on the bottom of
handle assembly to unlatch it and
lift up on the handle.
There may be additional storage
compartments on each side of the
cargo management system. Lift the
panel up to open.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6
Storage
Storing the Cargo Management
System Cover
1. Open the cover.
Access the rear areas of the cargo
management system:
WARNING
{
An improperly latched and closed
cargo cover, or cargo cover left
in the open position, could be
thrown about the vehicle during a
collision or sudden maneuver.
Someone could be injured. Be
sure to return the cover to the
closed position and latch before
driving. If the cover is removed,
always store it outside of the
vehicle. When it is replaced,
always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
3. Store the cargo management
system cover by hooking it onto
the weatherstrip.
2. Release the prop rod from
the inside cover by sliding
downward on the red clip (A).
Unhook the prop rod from the
pin on the inside cover. Store the
unhooked prop rod by folding it
into the cargo management
compartment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
3-7
D-Ring Sliders
U-Rail
There are four D-Ring sliders that
move along rails on both sides of
the cargo management area. These
can be used as tie-downs when
storing cargo.
Installing D-Ring Sliders
The loop of the D-Ring slider must
be facing inward towards the
storage area and the ring must be in
the up position for proper usage.
For vehicles with a U-Rail system,
move the gate around the u-shaped
track to store and secure cargo in
place.
Push the button to move the D-Ring
slider either towards the front or the
rear of the vehicle. The rings can be
locked into various positions along
the rail.
To install the D-Ring slider (A),
insert it into the channel (B) located
in the middle of both rails.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-8
Storage
Storing the U-Rail Gate
Cargo Net
WARNING
{
Do not stack items higher than
the upper end of the cargo net or
hang anything from the net. Avoid
items that have sharp edges or
that apply excessive force to the
net. If items are not properly
stored, damage to the net could
occur and items can be thrown
about the vehicle. You or other
could be injured. Always store
items behind the net.
3. Insert the top of the gate into the
lower two clips (A).
Remove the gate from the U-Rail by
pressing the button and lifting
upward.
4. Flip the bottom of the gate
up and insert into the upper
two clips (B).
For vehicles equipped with a cargo
net, it can be used to store light
loads, keeping them from falling
over or being thrown into the cabin
during heavy braking.
1. Lift the cargo management
system cover.
2. Release the cover from the prop
rod as described in previous
steps.
The net should not be overloaded or
used to store heavy loads.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
3-9
There are four openings in the
headliner, two located behind the
front seats and two behind the rear
seats.
3. Mount the cargo net to the rear
seat tethers located on the back
of the folded down rear seats
and pull on the straps to tighten
the net.
5. Mount the cargo net to the cargo
tie-downs located on the lower
side panels.
1. Insert the top corners of the
cargo net into the large opening
in the headliner and secure by
sliding them into the small
opening.
4. When the net is installed in
the headliner opening located
behind the rear seats, the rear
seat backs should be upright.
2. The rear seat backs should be
folded down, when the net is
installed in the headliner
opening located behind the
front seats.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-10
Storage
3. Roll up the cargo net, storing it
into the attached vinyl bag.
Roof Rack System
4. Open the cargo management
system lid.
WARNING
{
If something is carried on top of
the vehicle that is longer or wider
than the roof rack— like paneling,
plywood, or a mattress— the wind
can catch it while the vehicle is
being driven. The item being
carried could be violently torn off,
and this could cause a collision,
and damage the vehicle. Never
carry something longer or wider
than the roof rack on top of the
vehicle unless using a GM
5. For vehicles with an inflator kit,
store the cargo net in the
available space next to the kit.
Convenience Net
This vehicle may have a
convenience net located in the
rear of the vehicle. Attach it to the
cargo tie-downs for storing small
loads.
6. Pull on the straps to tighten
the net.
Cargo Net Storage
Do not use the net to store heavy
loads.
The cargo net can be removed from
the vehicle and stored in the cargo
management system.
Certified accessory carrier.
1. Disconnect the net from the roof
openings and the tethers.
2. Press the red button on the
center of the net to fold it in half.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
3-11
For vehicles with a roof rack, the
rack can be used to load items.
For roof racks that do not have
cross rails included, GM Certified
cross rails can be purchased as an
accessory. See your dealer/retailer
for additional information.
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking or abrupt maneuvers,
otherwise it may result in loss of
control. If driving for a long distance,
on rough roads, or at high speeds,
occasionally stop the vehicle to
make sure the cargo remains in its
place. Do not exceed the maximum
vehicle capacity when loading the
vehicle. For more information on
vehicle capacity and loading, see
Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑11.
Notice: Loading cargo on the
roof rack that weighs more than
100 kg (220 lbs) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
so that it rests evenly between
the crossrails, making sure to
fasten cargo securely.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo
when driving, check to make sure
cross rails and cargo are securely
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
rack will make the vehicle’s center
of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-12
Storage
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-1
Electric Parking Brake
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 4-25
Traction Control System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Instruments and
Controls
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Fuel Economy Gauge . . . . . . . . 4-16
Turbo Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 4-17
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 4-18
Passenger Airbag Status
Instrument Panel Overview
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 4-25
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 4-26
Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 4-27
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Adaptive Forward Lighting
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 4-6
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 4-6
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 4-7
Rear Window Wiper/
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Clock (Analog Clock) . . . . . . . . 4-10
Clock (Digital Clock) . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
(AFL) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 4-28
Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Lamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Charging System Light . . . . . . 4-20
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2
Instruments and Controls
Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 4-39
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Information Displays
Driver Information
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 4-39
Starting the Vehicle
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Transmission Messages . . . . . 4-40
Vehicle Reminder
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Brake System Messages . . . . 4-34
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Cruise Control Messages . . . . 4-34
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Engine Cooling System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 4-41
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 4-41
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 4-36
Engine Power Messages . . . . 4-36
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 4-36
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 4-37
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Airbag System Messages . . . . 4-39
OnStar® System
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 4-48
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Universal Remote System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-3
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4
Instruments and Controls
Instrument Panel Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-5
A. Air Vents on page 7‑6.
J. Exterior Lamp Controls on
P. Parking Brake on page 8‑29.
page 5‑1. Front Fog Lamps on
page 5‑5 (If Equipped).
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 5‑6.
B. Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Q. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into
Park on page 8‑20.
on page 5‑5
.
C. Cruise Control on page 8‑35
D. Instrument Cluster on
.
R. StabiliTrak System on
page 8‑33. Ultrasonic Parking
Assist on page 8‑38
(If Equipped). Economy Mode
(If Equipped). See Fuel
K. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 4‑14
E. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 4‑6
F. AM-FM Radio on page 6‑11.
G. Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 4‑29
.
page 4‑6
.
L. Horn on page 4‑7.
.
Economy Mode on page 8‑27.
M. Start/Stop Button. See Starting
the Gasoline Engine on
S. Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 7‑1.
page 8‑18
.
.
N. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 4‑7. Rear Window
T. Glove Box on page 3‑1.
H. Clock (Analog Clock) on
page 4‑10 or Clock (Digital
Clock) on page 4‑11.
Wiper/Washer on page 4‑9.
O. Heated Front Seats on
page 2‑8 (If Equipped). Heated
and Ventilated Front Seats on
page 2‑9 (If Equipped).
I. Safety Locks on page 1‑12
.
Power Door Locks on
page 1‑11. Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 5‑5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-6
Instruments and Controls
To tilt and telescope the steering
wheel, pull the lever down. Then
move the steering wheel up or
down or backward or forward into
a comfortable position. Pull the
lever up to lock the steering wheel
in place.
y / z : Press the y button to
select the next favorite radio station
or next CD, DVD, if equipped,
or MP3 track.
Controls
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
A tilt and telescope wheel lets the
steering wheel be adjusted.
Press the z button to select the
previous favorite radio station or
previous CD, DVD, if equipped,
or MP3 track.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
+ x − (Volume): Press + to
increase the volume, press − to
decrease the volume.
Steering Wheel Controls
b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles
with an OnStar®, Bluetooth,
or navigation system, press to
interact with those systems. See
OnStar® System on page 4‑46,
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 6‑47
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
on page 6‑48 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 6‑52 or
Bluetooth (Navigation) on
The tilt and telescope lever is
located on the left side of the
steering column.
page 6‑63, or the separate
navigation manual for more
information.
For vehicles with audio steering
wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-7
$ / c (End Call / Mute): Press
to silence the vehicle speakers
only. Press again to turn the sound
on. For vehicles with OnStar®
or Bluetooth systems, press to
reject an incoming call, or end a
current call.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
& (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
Turn the & band up for more
frequent wipes or down for less
frequent wipes. If the vehicle has
Rainsense™, see following
Rainsense™ information.
SRCE: Press to select an audio
source.
Horn
Press near the horn symbols or
press on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
( (Off): Turns the wipers off.
The windshield wiper/washer
lever is located on the right side
of the steering column. With the
ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN/START, move the
windshield wiper lever to select
the wiper speed.
8 (Mist): Single wipe, briefly
move the wiper lever down.
Several wipes, hold the wiper
lever down.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged blades should
be replaced. See Wiper Blade
2: Fast wipes.
1: Slow wipes.
Replacement on page 9‑29.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-8
Instruments and Controls
Wipe Parking
With Rainsense, if the transmission
is in N (Neutral) and the vehicle
speed is very slow, the wipers will
automatically stop at the base of the
windshield.
If the ignition is turned LOCK/OFF
while the wipers are on 1, 2 or &,
they will immediately stop.
If the windshield wiper lever is then
moved to OFF before the driver
door is opened or within 10 minutes,
the wipers will restart and move to
the base of the windshield.
The wiper operations return to
normal when the transmission is no
longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle
speed has increased.
& (Rainsense Wipe Sensitivity
Control): Move the windshield
wiper lever to &. Turn the band
on the wiper lever to adjust the
sensitivity.
Windshield Washer
If the ignition is turned to
Pull the lever toward you to spray
washer fluid on the windshield.
The spray continues until the lever
is released. The wipers will run a
few times. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑23 for information on filling
the windshield washer fluid
reservoir.
LOCK/OFF while the wipers
are performing wipes due to
windshield wash, the wipers
continue to run until they reach
the base of the windshield.
Turn the band up for more
sensitivity to moisture.
Turn the band down for less
sensitivity to moisture.
To deactivate Rainsense, move
the windshield wiper lever out
Rainsense™
For vehicles with Rainsense, a
sensor located near the top center
of the windshield detects the
amount of water on the windshield
and automatically controls the
frequency of the windshield wiper.
of & position.
Wiper Arm Assembly Protection
WARNING
{
When using an automatic car wash,
move the windshield wiper lever to
the OFF position. This disables the
automatic Rainsense windshield
wipes and/or rear wipers.
In freezing weather, do not use
your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
Keep this area of the windshield
clear of debris to allow for best
system performance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-9
windshield wiper is performing
Rear Window
Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper controls are on the
end of the windshield wiper lever.
Z (Rear Wiper): For continuous
rear window wipes.
interval wipes, then the rear wiper
automatically performs interval
wipes.
5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Sets a
delay between wipes.
The windshield washer reservoir is
used for the windshield and the rear
window. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir if either washer is not
working. See Washer Fluid on
= (Rear Washer): Push the
windshield wiper lever forward to
spray washer fluid on the rear
window. The lever automatically
returns to its original position when
released.
page 9‑23
.
Reverse Gear Wipes
WARNING
{
If the rear wiper control is off, the
rear wiper will automatically operate
continuously when the shift lever
is in R (Reverse) and the front
windshield wiper is performing low
or high speed wipes. If the rear
wiper control is off, the shift lever
is in R (Reverse) and the front
In freezing weather, do not use
your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
Press the upper or lower portion of
the button to control the rear wiper
and rear wiper delay.
The system turns off when the
button is returned to the middle
position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-10
Instruments and Controls
a heading again. See Compass
Messages on page 4‑34 for more
information on the messages that
may be displayed for the compass.
Headlamp Washer
For vehicles with headlamp
washers, they are located to the
side of the headlamps.
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). The compass
receives its heading and other
information from Global Positioning
System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,
and vehicle speed information.
Clock (Analog Clock)
The headlamps must be on in order
to use the headlamp washers. If the
headlamps are not on, only the
windshield will be washed.
The analog clock is located on the
instrument panel above the radio.
The clock is not connected with any
other vehicle system and runs by
itself. To adjust the clock:
Avoid covering the GPS antenna for
long periods of time with objects
that may interfere with the antenna's
ability to receive a satellite signal.
See Multi-Band Antenna on
page 6‑18 for the location of the
vehicle's antennas. The compass
system is designed to operate for a
certain number of miles or degrees
of turn before needing a signal
from the GPS satellites. When the
compass display shows CAL, drive
the vehicle for a short distance in an
open area where it can receive a
GPS signal. The compass system
will automatically determine when
GPS signal is restored and provide
Pull the wiper lever towards you
and hold briefly to activate. The
headlamp washers will spray once,
pause, and spray again. The
headlamp washer will spray again
after five windshield wash cycles.
1. Locate the adjustment buttons
directly below the clock face.
2. Push and hold either adjustment
button to advance or reverse the
clock hands. Holding the buttons
down will cause the clock to
advance faster. Release the
buttons before reaching the
desired time.
See Washer Fluid on page 9‑23 for
information on filling the windshield
washer fluid.
WARNING
{
3. Push and release the buttons to
increase the time by one minute
increments until the desired time
is reached.
In freezing weather, do not use
your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-11
Setting the Time and Date
Setting the Month & Day
Format
Clock (Digital Clock)
1. Press the CONFIG button.
The infotainment system controls
are used to access the time and
date settings through the menu
system. See Operation on
page 6‑7 for information about
how to use the menu system. See
the separate navigation system
manual for instructions on how to
operate the digital clock for the
navigation system.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Select Set Time or Set Date.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight Month & Day Format.
4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
adjust the highlighted value.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select MM/DD (month/day) or
DD/MM (day/month).
5. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select the next value.
Setting the Auto Time Adjust
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.
6. To save the time or date
and return to the Time and
Date Settings menu, press
To turn the digital clock on or off:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Select Clock Displayed.
the 0 BACK button at any time
or press the MENU/SELECT
knob after adjusting the minutes
or year.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to turn Auto Time Adjust on
or off.
4. Press MENU/SELECT to turn
the clock on or off.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select the 12 hour or 24 hour
display format.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-12
Instruments and Controls
Notice: Leaving electrical
Notice: Adding any electrical
equipment to the vehicle can
damage it or keep other
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cellular telephone.
equipment plugged in for an
extended period of time while
the vehicle is off will drain the
battery. Power is always supplied
to the rear cargo outlet. Always
unplug electrical equipment when
not in use and do not plug in
equipment that exceeds the
maximum 20 ampere rating.
components from working as
they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage
rating of 20 amperes. Check with
your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
The vehicle has four accessory
power outlets. The power outlets
located under the climate control
system, inside the center floor
console, and on the rear of the
center floor console are powered
while the vehicle is in ON/RUN/
START or ACC/ACCESSORY
mode, or until the driver door is
opened within 10 minutes of turning
off the vehicle.
Certain accessory power plugs may
not be compatible to the accessory
power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If you experience a problem,
see your dealer for additional
information on the accessory power
outlets.
Follow the proper installation
instructions that are included with
any electrical equipment you install.
Notice: Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle
The power outlet located in the rear
cargo area is powered at all times.
warranty. Do not hang any type
of accessory or accessory
There is a small cap that must be
removed to access the accessory
power outlet. When not using the
outlet be sure to cover it with the
protective cap.
bracket from the plug because
the power outlets are designed
for accessory power plugs only.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-13
Cigarette Lighter
There may be a cigarette lighter
located under the climate control
system, inside the front storage bin.
Ashtrays
There may be an ashtray located
under the climate control system on
the instrument panel. Press the door
to release the ashtray.
Warning Lights,
Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
To activate the cigarette lighter,
push it into the heating element and
let go. The lighter pops out when it
is ready to be used.
To empty the ashtray, remove it from
the instrument panel by holding the
edges and pulling straight out. To
reinstall, push the tray back into
place.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
in while it is heating does not let
the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating can
occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be
Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
There may also be ashtrays located
on the center floor console behind
the shift lever and in the rear doors.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other
flammable items are put in the
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage the
vehicle. Never put flammable
items in the ashtray.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.
blown. Do not hold a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-14
Instruments and Controls
Instrument Cluster
United States version shown, Canada similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-15
Notice: If the engine is operated
Here are four things that some
owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
Speedometer
with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area, the vehicle could
be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning area.
The speedometer shows the
vehicle's speed in both kilometers
per hour (km/h) and miles per
hour (mph).
.
At the service station, the fuel
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
.
It takes a little more or less
Odometer
fuel to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
Fuel Gauge
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
new odometer installed, the new
one is set to the mileage of the old
odometer. If this is not possible, it is
set at zero and a label is put on the
driver's door to show the old
.
The gauge moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.
United States
Canada
.
The gauge takes a few seconds
When the ignition is on, the fuel
gauge indicates about how much
fuel is left in the tank.
to stabilize after the ignition is
turned on, and goes back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off.
mileage reading.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the
engine speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates the side of the vehicle
the fuel door is on.
When the indicator nears empty,
the low fuel light comes on. There
still is a little fuel left, but the vehicle
should be refueled soon.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-16
Instruments and Controls
Fuel Economy Gauge
Turbo Gauge
Canada
The gauge shows the fuel usage
that the vehicle is currently
achieving in liters per
US
For vehicles with a turbo gauge, it
indicates when the vehicle is using
turbo power.
The gauge shows the fuel economy
that the vehicle is currently
achieving.
100 kilometers (¹/100 km).
When the needle is in the white
area (left) of the gauge, turbo is not
being used.
20: Is the minimum fuel economy.
This least efficient fuel economy
usually occurs during quick
MIN: Is the minimum fuel economy.
This least efficient fuel economy
usually occurs during quick
accelerations or when idling.
As the accelerator peddle is
accelerations or when idling.
pressed the needle may move into
the red area (right) of the gauge.
This is normal and means that the
vehicle is using turbo power. Once
the driver eases off the accelerator
pedal or the transmission shifts, the
needle moves back into the white
area of the gauge.
¹/100: Is the maximum fuel
economy. The best fuel economy
usually occurs during coasting.
MAX: Is the maximum fuel
economy. The best fuel economy
usually occurs during coasting.
This gauge moves often as it is an
instantaneous calculation based on
current driving conditions.
This gauge moves often as it is an
instantaneous calculation based on
current driving conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-17
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
Safety Belt Reminders
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
There is a driver safety belt
reminder light on the instrument
panel cluster.
United States
Canada
When the engine is started this light
and the chime come on and stay on
for several seconds to remind the
passenger to fasten their safety belt.
The light also begins to flash.
This gauge measures the
temperature of the vehicle's engine.
If the indicator needle moves into
the shaded area, the engine is too
hot. A temperature indicator light will
turn on.
When the engine is started this light
and a chime come on and stay on
for several seconds to remind
drivers to fasten their safety belts.
The light also begins to flash.
This cycle repeats if the passenger
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
If the vehicle has been operating
under normal driving conditions,
and the temperature indicator light
comes on, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
This cycle repeats if the driver
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
If the driver safety belt is already
buckled, neither the light nor chime
come on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-18
Instruments and Controls
The front passenger safety belt
warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
bag, laptop or other electronic
device. To turn off the warning light
and or chime, remove the object
from the seat or buckle the
If the Vehicle Information display
is selected, a full page screen
displays at start-up that has the
three seatbelt symbols.
Airbag Readiness Light
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem. The system
check includes the airbag sensor,
the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash
sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on
Once the passenger seatbelt is
buckled, the corresponding seat
belt symbol in the DIC turns green.
There are no seat position sensors
in the seat. If a seatbelt is not
initially buckled, the cluster
continues to show the gray
seatbelt icon.
safety belt
Second Row Passenger Belt
Reminder Light
page 2‑27
.
While the vehicle is moving, if a
second row passenger that was
previously buckled becomes
unbuckled, a full screen warning
displays with the corresponding seat
belt indicator flashing red. A chime
may sound.
The airbag readiness light comes on
and stays on for several seconds
when the vehicle is started. Then
the light turns off.
When the engine is started and
the Trip/Fuel display is chosen,
three gray seatbelt symbols come
on and stay on for several seconds
on the top of the Driver information
Center (DIC) to remind passengers
to fasten their safety belts.
Acknowledge warning messages by
pressing any of the DIC switches.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-19
Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either
ON or OFF, or either the on or off
symbol to let you know the status of
the right front passenger frontal and
seat‐mounted side impact airbag.
WARNING
{
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
United States
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right
front passenger frontal airbag and
seat‐mounted side impact airbag
are enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol
is lit on the passenger airbag
status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger
frontal and seat‐mounted side
impact airbag.
Canada
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑36 for
important safety information. The
overhead console has a passenger
airbag status indicator.
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. If you are using
remote start, if equipped, to start
the vehicle from a distance you
may not see the system check.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-20
Instruments and Controls
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See
your dealer/retailer for service.
See Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages on page 4‑33.
Charging System Light
This light and a Transport Mode On
message display when the vehicle
is in Transport Mode. For more
information, see Key and Lock
Messages on page 4‑37.
WARNING
{
If a short distance must be driven
with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
The charging system light comes
on briefly when the ignition is turned
on, but the engine is not running,
as a check to show the light is
working. The light turns off when
the engine is started. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 4‑18 for more
information, including important
safety information.
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems. It ensures that
emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
If the light stays on, or comes on
while driving, there may be a
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your
dealer/retailer. Driving while this
light is on could drain the battery.
When this light comes on, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) also
displays a message.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-21
Notice: If the vehicle is
This light comes on during a
continually driven with this light
on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well,
the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
This light comes on when the
ignition is on, but the engine is
not running, as a check to show
it is working. If it does not, have
the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
The following can prevent more
serious damage to the vehicle:
Notice: Modifications made
to the engine, transmission,
exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement
of the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. This
.
.
.
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the check engine light comes on
and stays on, while the engine is
running, this indicates that there is
an OBD II problem and service is
required.
If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled as
soon as it is possible.
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
If the light continues to flash, when
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park the
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
least 10 seconds, and restart the
engine. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see
your dealer/retailer for service as
soon as possible.
could also result in a failure
to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
See Accessories and
Modifications on page 9‑3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-22
Instruments and Controls
.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local
governments have or might begin
programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on the vehicle.
Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle
registration.
An emission system malfunction
might be corrected.
.
Make sure the fuel cap is fully
installed. See Filling the Tank on
page 8‑48. The diagnostic
system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the
light off.
Here are some things to know to
help the vehicle pass an inspection:
If one or more of these
conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper
fuel to turn the light off.
.
The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the check engine
light is on with the engine
running, or if the ignition is
placed in ON/RUN and the light
is not on.
See Gasoline Specifications on
page 8‑45
.
.
If none of the above have made
the light turn off, your dealer/retailer
can check the vehicle. The
dealer/retailer has the proper test
equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have
If the vehicle has been driven
through a deep puddle of water,
the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is
usually corrected when the
electrical system dries out.
A few driving trips should turn
the light off.
developed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-23
.
The vehicle will not pass
Brake System Warning
Light
This vehicle's hydraulic brake
system is divided into two parts.
If one part is not working, the other
part can still work and stop the
vehicle. For good braking both
parts need to be working well.
this inspection if the OBD II
(on-board diagnostic) system
determines that critical emission
control systems have not
WARNING
{
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.
been completely diagnosed
by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready
for inspection. This can happen
if the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II
system readiness, your
If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away.
If the light comes on while driving,
a chime sounds. Pull off the road
and stop. The pedal might be harder
to push or go closer to the floor.
It might also take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the
United States
Canada
dealer/retailer can prepare
the vehicle for inspection.
vehicle towed for service. See
Towing the Vehicle on page 9‑105.
The brake indicator light should
come on briefly as the engine is
started. If it does not come on
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-24
Instruments and Controls
If the light does not come on,
or remains flashing, see your
dealer/retailer.
Electric Parking Brake
Light
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
United States
Canada
This light comes on briefly when the
engine is started.
For vehicles with the Electric Park
Brake (EPB), the brake warning
light should come on briefly when as
the engine is started. If it does not
come on, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
For vehicles with the Electric Park
Brake (EPB), this light should
come on briefly as the engine is
started. If it does not come on,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
If the light does not come on, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
If the ABS light comes on and stays
on while driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off.
Start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on
after driving at a speed of at least
20 km/h (13 mph), or comes on
again while driving, see your dealer
retailer for service. A chime may
also sound when the light comes on
steady.
If this light comes on there is a
problem with a system on the
vehicle that is causing the park
brake system to work at a reduced
level. The vehicle can still be
driven, but should be taken to a
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
See Parking Brake on page 8‑29
for more information.
The park brake status light comes
on when the brake is applied. If the
light continues flashing after the
park brake is released, or while
driving, there is a problem with the
Electric Parking Brake system.
A SERVICE PARKING BRAKE
message may also display in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Brake System Messages on
page 4‑34 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-25
If both ABS and brake warning
If the Traction Control System (TCS)
is off wheelspin is not limited. Adjust
driving accordingly.
Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTrak
system and the warning light
turns off.
lights are on, the vehicle's antilock
brakes are not functioning and there
is a problem with the regular brakes.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8‑32 and StabiliTrak
System on page 8‑33 for more
information.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8‑32 and StabiliTrak
System on page 8‑33 for more
information
See Brake System Warning Light
on page 4‑23
.
See Brake System Messages on
page 4‑34 for all brake related DIC
messages.
StabiliTrak® OFF Light
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
Traction Off Light
This light comes on when the
StabiliTrak system is turned off by
pressing the StabiliTrak/TCS button.
If the Traction Control System (TCS)
is off, wheel spin is not limited.
The StabiliTrak system or the
Traction Control System (TCS)
indicator/warning light comes on
briefly while starting the engine.
This light comes on when the
Traction Control System (TCS) has
been turned off by pressing and
releasing the traction control button.
When the StabiliTrak system is
off, the system does not assist in
controlling the vehicle. Adjust
driving accordingly.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
If the system is working normally
the indicator light will then go off.
This light along with the StabiliTrak
OFF light come on when StabiliTrak
is turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-26
Instruments and Controls
The indicator/warning light flashes
while the StabiliTrak or TCS system
is working to control the vehicle on
a low traction surface.
loading information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑59 for more
information.
Tire Pressure Light
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is On Steady
If the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
comes on and stays on while
driving, try to reset the system.
Stop and turn off the engine for at
least 15 seconds. Then start the
engine again. If this light still comes
on and stays on, the vehicle needs
service.
This indicates that there may be a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on
steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
For vehicles with a tire pressure
monitoring system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine is
started. It provides information
about tire pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
The vehicle is safe to drive , but
StabiliTrak is not active, adjust
driving accordingly.
Operation on page 9‑62 for more
information.
When the Light is On Steady
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8‑32 and StabiliTrak
System on page 8‑33 for more
information.
This indicates that one or more of
the tires are significantly
underinflated.
Engine Oil Pressure Light
WARNING
{
A tire pressure message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC),
can accompany the light.
See Tire Messages on page 4‑39
for more information. Stop as soon
as possible, and inflate the tires to
the pressure value shown on the tire
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-27
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Fuel Economy Light
Low Fuel Warning Light
For vehicles with the fuel economy
mode light, it comes on when the
eco (economy) switch, located next
to the shifter, is pressed. Press the
switch again to turn off the light
and exit the fuel saver mode. See
Driving for Better Fuel Economy on
page 8‑2 for more information.
This light is located below the fuel
gauge and comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on as a check
to show it is working.
It also comes on when the fuel tank
is low on fuel. The light turns off
when fuel is added. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced.
The oil pressure light should
come on briefly as the engine is
started. If it does not come on
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem. See
your dealer/retailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-28
Instruments and Controls
Security Light
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) Light
Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) Indicator Light
This light flashes when the security
system is activated.
This light comes on solid when
there is a problem with the Adaptive
Forward Lighting system and
flashes when the system is
switching between lighting modes.
See Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) on page 5‑3 for more
information.
This light turns on whenever the
Daytime Running Lamps are in use.
For more information, see Vehicle
Security on page 1‑17.
See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on page 5‑2 for more information.
High-Beam on Light
This light comes on when the
high-beam headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 5‑2 for more
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-29
Fog Lamp Light
Cruise Control Light
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The vehicle may have a Driver
Information Center (DIC). The DIC
displays information about your
vehicle. It also displays warning
messages if a system problem is
detected. See Vehicle Messages on
page 4‑33 for more information. All
messages appear in the DIC display
located in the center of the
The fog lamp light comes on when
the fog lamps are in use.
The cruise control light is white
whenever the cruise control is set
and turns green when the cruise
control is active.
The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Front Fog
Lamps on page 5‑5 for more
information.
The light turns off when the cruise
control is switched off. See Cruise
Control on page 8‑35 for more
information.
instrument panel cluster.
The vehicle may also have features
that can be customized through the
controls on the radio. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 4‑41 for
more information.
Lamps on Reminder
For vehicles with the lamps on
reminder light, it comes on when the
lights are in use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-30
Instruments and Controls
.
.
.
.
Navigation Turn by Turn
Speed and Curve Assist
Digital Speedometer
Blank
DIC Operation and Displays
w x (Thumbwheel): Use the
thumbwheel to scroll through the
items in each menu. A small marker
will move up or down the side of the
display as you scroll through the
items. This shows where each item
is in the menu.
The DIC has different displays
which can be accessed by using
the DIC buttons located on the turn
signal lever located on the left side
of the steering wheel. The DIC
displays trip, fuel, vehicle system
information, and warning messages
if a system problem is detected.
Trip
The Trip display shows the
SET (Set/Clear): Use this button to
set or clear the menu item when it is
displayed.
current distance traveled, in either
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) , since
the trip odometer was last reset.
The trip odometer can be reset to
zero by pressing the trip reset stem
or the SET button while the trip
odometer display is showing.
The bottom of the DIC display
shows what position the shift
lever is in and the odometer. The
direction the vehicle is driving will
be shown on the top of the display.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
Press the MENU button on the
turn signal lever until Trip/Fuel
Information Menu is displayed.
Use the thumbwheel to scroll
through the following menu items:
DIC Buttons
Average Fuel Economy or
Average Fuel Economy and
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
.
Trip
The Average Fuel Economy
.
Average Fuel Economy or
display shows the approximate
average liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) or miles per
gallon (mpg). This number is
calculated based on the number of
L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the
last time this menu item was reset.
Average Fuel Economy and
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
.
Fuel Range
MENU: Press this button to get to
the Trip/Fuel Menu and the Vehicle
Information Menu.
.
Fuel Used
.
Average Vehicle Speed
.
Elapsed Time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-31
The Average Fuel Economy can be
reset by pressing SET while the
Average Fuel Economy display is
showing.
Fuel Used
Elapsed Time
The Fuel Used display shows
the approximate gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel that has been used
since last reset. The fuel used can
be reset by pressing the SET button
while the Fuel Used display is
showing.
This display can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press SET while
Elapsed Time is displayed. The
display will show the amount of time
that has passed since the timer was
last reset. To stop the timer, press
SET briefly while Elapsed Time is
displayed. To reset the timer to zero,
press and hold SET.
The Instantaneous Fuel Economy
display shows the current fuel
economy in either liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles
per gallon (mpg). This number
reflects only the fuel economy
that the vehicle has right now and
changes frequently as driving
conditions change. Unlike average
economy, this display cannot be
reset.
Average Vehicle Speed
The Average Vehicle Speed display
shows the average speed of the
vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or
kilometers per hour (km/h). This
average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded
since the last reset of this value.
The average speed can be reset by
pressing the SET button while the
Average Vehicle Speed display is
showing.
Turn by Turn
This display is used for the OnStar
or Navigation System Turn-by-Turn
guidance. See OnStar® System on
page 4‑46 or the Navigation
manual, if the vehicle has
navigation, for more information.
Fuel Range
The Fuel Range display shows the
approximate distance the vehicle
can be driven without refueling.
The fuel range estimate is based on
an average of the vehicle's fuel
economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in
the fuel tank. Fuel range cannot be
reset.
Speed and Curve Assist
This display will show the speed
limit or the advised speed as
determined by the information on
the map disc in the navigation
system. If there is no map disc in
the navigation system, this display
will not be available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-32
Instruments and Controls
Digital Speedometer
Unit
When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display.
See Engine Oil Messages on
page 4‑36. The oil should be
changed as soon as possible.
See Engine Oil on page 9‑10. In
addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled
The speedometer shows how fast
the vehicle is moving in either miles
per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). The speedometer
cannot be reset.
Move the thumbwheel up or down to
switch between US or Metric when
the Unit display is active. Press
SET to confirm the setting. This will
change the displays on the cluster
and DIC to either English (US) or
metric measurements.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Tire Pressure
Vehicle Information Menu
Items
The display will show a vehicle with
the approximate pressures of all
four tires. Tire pressure is displayed
in either pounds per square
inch (psi) or in kilopascal (kPa).
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 9‑61 and Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 9‑62 for
more information.
Maintenance on page 10‑2 for
more information.
Press the MENU button on the
turn signal lever until Vehicle
Information Menu is displayed.
Use the thumbwheel to scroll
through the following menu items:
Remember, the Oil Life display
must be reset after each oil change.
It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the Oil Life
display accidentally at any time
other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system
press the SET button while the Oil
Life display is active. See Engine
.
Unit
.
Tire Pressure
Remaining Oil Life
.
Remaining Oil Life
This display shows an estimate
of the oil's remaining useful life.
If Remaining Oil Life 99% is
displayed, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains.
.
Battery Voltage
.
Blank
Oil Life System on page 9‑12
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-33
Battery Voltage
Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages
Vehicle Messages
Messages are displayed on the
DIC to notify the driver that the
status of the vehicle has changed
and that some action may be
needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may
appear one after another.
This display, available on some
vehicles, shows the current battery
voltage. If the voltage is in the
normal range, the value will display.
For example, the display may read
Battery Voltage 15.0 Volts. The
vehicle's charging system regulates
voltage based on the state of
the battery. The battery voltage
can fluctuate while viewing this
information on the DIC. This is
normal. See Charging System Light
on page 4‑20 for more information.
If there is a problem with the battery
charging system, the DIC will
Battery Saver Active
This message displays when
the vehicle has detected that the
battery voltage is dropping beyond
a reasonable point. The battery
saver system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may
be able to notice. At the point that
features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the
vehicle is trying to save the charge
in the battery. Turn off unnecessary
accessories to allow the battery to
recharge.
Some messages may not require
immediate action, but you can
press SET to acknowledge that
you received the messages and to
clear them from the display. Some
messages cannot be cleared from
the DIC display because they are
more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be
cleared. You should take any
display a message. See Battery
Voltage and Charging Messages on
Low Battery
page 4‑33
.
messages that appear on the
This message is displayed when the
battery voltage is low. See Battery
on page 9‑27 for more information.
Blank Display
display seriously and remember
that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not
correct the problem. You will find
the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information
about them grouped by subject in
the following information.
This display shows no information.
Compass
The vehicle may have a compass
display in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Compass on
page 4‑10
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-34
Instruments and Controls
Service Battery Charging
System
Release Parking Brake
Compass Messages
This message is displayed if the
electric parking brake is on while
the vehicle is in motion. Release it
before you attempt to drive. See
Parking Brake on page 8‑29 for
more information.
CAL
This message is displayed when
there is a fault in the battery
charging system. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer for service.
This message is displayed when the
compass needs to be calibrated.
See Compass on page 4‑10.
– – –
Brake System Messages
Service Brake Assist
Three dashes will be displayed if the
compass needs service. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Brake Fluid Low
This message may be displayed
when there is a problem with the
brake boost assist system. When
This message is displayed when the
brake fluid level is low. See Brake
Fluid on page 9‑25.
this message is displayed, the brake Cruise Control Messages
boost assist motor might be heard
Apply Brakes Before Cruise
Brakes Overheated
operating and you might notice
pulsation in the brake pedal. This is
normal under these conditions. Take
the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for
service.
If this message displays when
attempting to activate cruise control,
apply the brake and then try again.
This message is displayed when the
brakes are becoming overheated.
You may see this when driving on
hills. Shift to a lower gear.
Cruise Set to XXX
Service Parking Brake
Step On Brake to Release Park
Brake
This message will display when the
cruise control is set and it will show
the speed it was set to. See Cruise
Control on page 8‑35 for more
information.
This message is displayed when
there is a problem with the parking
brake. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
This message is displayed if you
attempt to release the electric
parking brake without the brake
pedal applied. See Parking Brake
on page 8‑29 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-35
Engine Overheated — Idle
Engine
Door Ajar Messages
Engine Cooling System
Messages
Door Open
This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
A/C Off Due to High
Engine Temp
A door open symbol will be
displayed on the DIC showing which
door is open. If the vehicle has been
shifted out of P (Park), a Door Open
message will also be displayed.
Close the door completely.
This message displays when the
engine coolant becomes hotter
than the normal operating
temperature. To avoid added strain
on a hot engine, the air conditioning
compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature
returns to normal, the air
Engine Overheated — Stop
Engine
This message displays and a
Hood Open
continuous chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches
unsafe temperatures for operation.
Stop and turn off the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature.
This message will display along with
a hood open symbol when the hood
is open. Close the hood completely.
conditioning compressor turns
back on. You can continue to drive
the vehicle.
Power Liftgate Unavailable
This message will display if the
power liftgate encounters multiple
obstacles on the same power cycle.
After removing the obstructions, the
liftgate will resume normal power
operation.
If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
High Coolant Temperature
This message displays if the coolant
temperature is hot, see Engine
Overheating on page 9‑20.
Coolant Level Low Add
Coolant
Rear Access Open
This message will display if the
coolant is low, see Engine Coolant
This message will display along with
a symbol when the liftgate is open.
Close the liftgate completely.
on page 9‑17
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-36
Instruments and Controls
The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message
is on, but maximum acceleration
and speed may be reduced.
Anytime this message stays on,
the vehicle should be taken to your
dealer/retailer for service as
soon as possible.
Oil Pressure Low – Stop
Engine
Engine Oil Messages
Change Engine Oil Soon
This message displays if low oil
pressure levels occur. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible
and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
This message displays when the
engine oil needs to be changed.
When you change the engine oil, be
sure to reset the Oil Life System.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 9‑12 and Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑29 for
information on how to reset the
system. See Engine Oil on
Fuel System Messages
Fuel Level Low
Engine Power Messages
This message displays when the
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as
soon as possible
page 9‑10 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 10‑2 for
more information.
Engine Power Is Reduced
This message displays when the
vehicle's engine power is reduced.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there
is no reduction in performance,
proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven.
Tighten Gas Cap
Engine Oil Hot, Idle Engine
This message displays when the
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the
fuel cap.
This message displays when the
engine oil temperature is too hot.
Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
until it cools down.
Engine Oil Low – Add Oil
This message displays when the
engine oil level is too low. Check
the oil level. See Engine Oil on
page 9‑10
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-37
Remote Left In Vehicle
Key and Lock Messages
Lamp Messages
This message displays when
leaving the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter still inside.
No Remote Detected
AFL (Adaptive Forward
Lighting) Lamps Need Service
This message displays when trying
to start the vehicle if the keyless
access system does not detect a
RKE transmitter. The transmitter
battery may be weak. See “Starting
the Vehicle with a Low Transmitter
Battery” under Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
This message displays when the
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)
system is disabled and needs
service. See your dealer/retailer.
See Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) on page 5‑3 for more
information.
Replace Battery In Remote Key
This message displays when the
battery in the RKE transmitter needs
to be replaced.
Transport Mode On
page 1‑3
.
This message displays when
Automatic Light Control On
the ignition is held in START for
15 seconds. The battery light may
also be flashing when this message
is displayed. To turn this message
off, start the vehicle and hold the
START button for 15 seconds.
No Remote Press Brake To
Restart
This message is displayed when
the automatic light control has been
turned on. See Automatic Headlamp
System on page 5‑3.
This message is displayed if the
remote is no longer detected in the
vehicle. Press the brake pedal to
restart the vehicle.
Automatic Light Control Off
This message is displayed when
the automatic light control has been
turned off. See Automatic Headlamp
System on page 5‑3.
Number Of Keys Programmed
This message displays when
programming new keys to the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-38
Instruments and Controls
The vehicle is safe to drive,
XXX Turn Indicator Failure
Service Park Assist
however, you do not have the
benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
your speed and drive accordingly.
When one of the turn signals is out,
this message displays to show
which bulb needs to be replaced.
See your dealer/retailer to have the
front turn signal bulbs replaced.
See Turn Signal Lamps on
page 9‑40 and Replacement Bulbs
on page 9‑43 for more information
on the rear turn signal bulb
This message is displayed if there
is a problem with the park assist
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Service Suspension System
This message displays if there is
a problem with the selective ride
control. See Selective Ride Control
Ride Control System
Messages
on page 8‑35
.
Service Rear Axle
replacement.
Service Traction Control
This message displays when there
is a problem with the All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) System. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Turn Signal On
This message displays when there
is a problem with the Traction
Control System (TCS). If this
This message is displayed if the
turn signal has been left on. Turn off
the turn signal.
message appears, try to reset the
system. Stop, turn off the engine for
at least 15 seconds, and then try
to start the engine again. If this
message still comes on, it means
there is a problem. When this
message is displayed, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Service Stabilitrak
This message displays if there is
a problem with the StabiliTrak®
system. If this message appears, try
to reset the system. Stop; turn off
the engine for at least 15 seconds;
then start the engine again. If this
message still comes on, it means
there is a problem. See your
Object Detection System
Messages
Park Assist Off
This message is displayed when the
park assist system has been turned
off. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
on page 8‑38
.
dealer/retailer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-39
Airbag System Messages
Service Vehicle Messages Starting the Vehicle
Messages
Service Airbag
Service AC System
Press Brake to Start Vehicle
This message is displayed if there
is a problem with the airbag
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the air conditioning
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
This message is displayed when
attempting to start the vehicle
without first pressing the brake
pedal.
Service Power Steering
Safety Belt Messages
Service Keyless Start System
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the power steering
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Buckle Seatbelt
This message is displayed if there
is a problem with the keyless start
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
This message displays as a
reminder when the safety belt is
not buckled.
Service Vehicle Soon
This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the vehicle. Take the
vehicle to your dealer/retailer for
service.
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages
Tire Messages
Service Tire Monitor System
Theft Attempted
This message displays if there is
a problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 9‑62 for more information.
This message displays if the vehicle
detects a tamper condition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-40
Instruments and Controls
If a tire pressure message appears
on the DIC, stop as soon as you
can. Inflate the tires by adding air
until the tire pressure is equal to the
values shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. See Tires on
page 9‑52, Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑11, and Tire Pressure on
Tire Learning Active
Shift To Park
This message displays when the
system is learning new tires. See
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 9‑62 for more information.
This message displays when the
transmission needs to be shifted to
P (Park). This may appear when
attempting to remove the key from
the ignition if the vehicle is not in
P (Park).
Tire Low Add Air To Tire
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the
vehicle's tires is low.
page 9‑59
.
Transmission Hot – Idle
Engine
You can receive more than one tire
pressure message at a time. To
read the other messages that may
have been sent at the same time,
press the set/reset button. The DIC
also shows the tire pressure values.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the transmission fluid in
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
transmission fluid temperature high
can cause damage to the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This
message clears when the fluid
This message also displays “Left
Front”, “Right Front”, “Left Rear”,
or “Right Rear” to indicate the
location of the low tire.
on page 4‑29
.
The low tire pressure warning light
will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 4‑26.
Transmission Messages
temperature reaches a safe level.
Service Transmission
This message displays if there is a
problem with the transmission. See
your dealer/retailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-41
Entering the Personalization
Menus
Vehicle Reminder
Messages
Vehicle
Personalization
1. Press CONFIG to access the
Configuration Settings menu.
Ice Possible Drive With Care
The audio system controls are
used to access the personalization
menus for customizing vehicle
features. Not all features are
available on every vehicle. Only the
features available on a particular
vehicle will be displayed on that
vehicle.
This message is displayed when ice
conditions are possible.
2. Turn the MENU / SELECT knob
to highlight Vehicle Settings.
3. Press the center of the
MENU / SELECT knob to select
the Vehicle Settings menu.
Turn Wiper Control to
Intermittent First
This message is displayed when
attempting to adjust the intermittent
wiper speed without intermittent
selected on the wiper control. See
Windshield Wiper/Washer on
The following list of menu items will
be available:
CONFIG (Configuration): Press
to access the Configuration
Settings Menu.
.
Climate and Air Quality
.
Comfort and Convenience
page 4‑7
.
MENU / SELECT Knob: Press
the center of this knob to enter the
menus and select menu items.
Turn the knob to scroll through
the menus.
.
Language
Washer Fluid Messages
.
Lighting
.
Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid
Power Door Locks
.
This message will be displayed
when the washer fluid level is low.
For information on filling the washer
fluid, see Washer Fluid on
Remote Locking, Unlocking,
0 BACK: Press to exit or move
backwards in a menu.
Starting
.
Return to Factory Settings
Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to
highlight the menu. Press the knob
to select it. Each of the menus is
detailed in the following information.
page 9‑23
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-42
Instruments and Controls
Air Quality Sensor
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
Climate and Air Quality
This will allow you to select whether
the system will operate at high or
low sensitivity. Only vehicles with
the dual zone climate control will
have this option.
When on, this feature will turn the
heated seats on when using remote
start on cold days.
Select the Climate and Air Quality
menu and the following will be
displayed:
.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
is highlighted. Turn the knob to
select On or Off. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Auto Fan Speed
.
Air Quality Sensor
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Air Quality Sensor is
.
Remote Start Auto Seat Cool
highlighted to open the menu.
Turn the knob to highlight High or
Low Sensitivity. Press the knob to
confirm the selection and move
back to the last menu.
.
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
.
Auto Defog
Auto Defog
.
Auto Rear Defog
This will allow you to turn the auto
defog on or off.
Auto Fan Speed
Remote Start Auto Seat Cool
This will allow you to select the
automatic fan speed.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Auto Defog is highlighted to
open the menu. Turn the knob to
highlight On or Off. Press the knob
to confirm the selection and move
back to the last menu.
When on, this feature will turn the
vented seats on when using remote
start on warm days.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Auto Fan Speed is highlighted
to open the menu. Turn the knob
to highlight High, Medium, or Low.
Press the knob to confirm the
selection and move back to the
last menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Remote Start Auto Seat Cool
is highlighted. Turn the knob to
select On or Off. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-43
Auto Rear Defog
Easy Exit Driver Seat
Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
This will allow you to turn the auto
rear defog on or off.
This allows you to turn the easy exit
seat feature on or off.
When on, the rear window wiper
will turn on automatically when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Auto Rear Defog is
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Easy Exit Driver Seat is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
highlighted to open the menu.
Turn the knob to highlight On or
Off. Press the knob to confirm the
selection and move back to the
last menu.
Chime Volume
Language
This allows the selection of the
chime volume level.
Comfort and Convenience
Select the Language menu and the
following will be displayed:
Select the Comfort and
Convenience menu and the
following will be displayed:
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Chime Volume is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select Normal or
High. Press the knob to confirm and
go back to the last menu.
.
English
.
French
.
Easy Exit Driver Seat
.
Spanish
.
Chime Volume
Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to
select the language. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Reverse Tilt Mirror
.
Reverse Tilt Mirror
This allows you to turn the park tilt
mirrors feature on or off.
.
Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Reverse Tilt Mirror is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Driver & Passenger or Off. Press
the knob to confirm and go back to
the last menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-44
Instruments and Controls
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Auto Door Unlock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
All Doors, Driver Door, or Off. Press
the knob to confirm and go back to
the last menu.
Lighting
Power Door Locks
Select the Lighting menu and the
following will be displayed:
Select Power Door Locks and the
following will be displayed:
.
.
Vehicle Locator Lights
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
.
.
Exit Lighting
Auto Door Unlock
.
Delayed Door Lock
Delayed Door Lock
Vehicle Locator Lights
When on, this feature will delay
the locking of the doors until
This allows the vehicle locator lights
to be turned on or off.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
When on, this feature will keep the
driver door from locking when the
door is open. If off is selected, the
Delayed Door Lock menu will be
available and the door will lock as
programmed through this menu.
five seconds after the last door is
closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal delayed locking is in use.
Pressing either the power lock
button or the lock button on the
RKE transmitter twice will override
the delayed locking feature and
immediately lock all of the doors.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Vehicle Locator Lights is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Auto Door Unlock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Exit Lighting
This allows the selection of how
long the exterior lamps stay on
when leaving the vehicle when it is
dark outside.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Delayed Door Lock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Auto Door Unlock
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Exit Lighting is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select Off,
30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes.
Press the knob to confirm and go
back to the last menu.
This allows selection of which of the
doors will automatically unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-45
Locking Feedback
When set to All Doors, all of the
doors will unlock at the first press of
the unlock button. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
This allows selection of what type of
feedback is given when locking the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
and the following will be displayed:
.
Unlock Feedback (Lights)
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Locking Feedback is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Lights and Horn, Lights Only,
Horn Only, or Off. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
.
Locking Feedback
Passive Door Lock
.
Door Unlock Options
If the vehicle has the keyless
.
access system, when enabled, this
feature allows the doors to lock after
several seconds if all doors are
closed and at least one keyless
access transmitter has been
removed from the interior of the
vehicle. It does not matter how far
away that the transmitter is from the
vehicle. This feature can also be
configured to chirp the horn when
the doors are passively locked.
Passive Door Lock
.
Passive Door Unlock
.
Remote Vehicle Start
.
Door Unlock Options
Remote Memory Recall
This allows selection of which doors
will unlock when pressing the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
Unlock Feedback (Lights)
When on, the exterior lamps will
flash when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Door Unlock Options is
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Unlock Feedback (Lights) is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Flash Lights or Off. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
All Doors or Driver Door Only.
When set to Driver Door Only, the
driver door will unlock the first time
the unlock button is pressed and
all doors will unlock when the
button is pressed a second time.
Press the MENU/SELECT knob
when Passive Door Lock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On With Chirp, On, or Off. Press the
knob to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-46
Instruments and Controls
OnStar® System
Passive Door Unlock
Remote Memory Recall
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this feature allows
you to select which doors will
automatically unlock when you open
the driver’s door with the keyless
access transmitter present.
This allows the Remote Memory
Recall feature to be turned on or off.
Remote Memory Recall is when the
memorized settings will be recalled
when you remotely unlock the
vehicle and open the driver door.
Press the MENU/SELECT knob
when Passive Door Unlock is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
All Doors or Driver Door. Press the
knob to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Remote Recall is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select On or Off.
Press the knob to confirm and go
back to the last menu.
OnStar® uses several innovative
technologies and live advisors to
provide a wide range of safety,
security, navigation, diagnostics,
and calling services.
Return to Factory Settings
Remote Vehicle Start
Automatic Crash Response
Select Return to Factory Settings
to return all of the vehicle
personalization to the default
settings. Turn the knob to select
Yes or No. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
This allows the Remote Vehicle
Start to be turned on or off, if the
vehicle has this feature.
In a crash, built in sensors can
automatically alert an OnStar
advisor who is immediately
connected to the vehicle to see
if you need help.
Press the MENU / SELECT knob
when Remote Vehicle Start is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
and go back to the last menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-47
For more information see the
OnStar Owner's Guide or visit
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or
for that area has coverage, network
capacity and reception when the
service is needed, and technology
that is compatible with the OnStar
service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas, or at
all times.
How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects you
to a specially trained OnStar advisor
to verify your account information
and to answer questions.
] : Push this red emergency
button to get priority help from
specially trained OnStar emergency
advisors.
TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or
press Q to speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
The OnStar system can record and
transmit vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to
X : Push this button for hands‐free,
voice‐activated calling and to give
voice commands for turn‐by‐turn
navigation.
For a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations,
see the OnStar Owner's Guide in
the glove box.
an OnStar call center when Q is
pressed, ] is pressed, or if the
airbags or ACR system deploy.
This information usually includes
the vehicle's GPS location and, in
the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the crash that
the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the
direction from which the vehicle was
hit). When the virtual advisor feature
of OnStar hands-free calling is
used, the vehicle also sends OnStar
the vehicle's GPS location so they
can provide services where it is
located.
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle
Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,
Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn
Navigation and Hands‐Free
Calling are available on most
vehicles. Not all OnStar services
are available on all vehicles.
OnStar service is subject to the
OnStar terms and conditions
included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
OnStar service cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area. OnStar service also
cannot work unless the vehicle is
in a place where the wireless
service provider OnStar has hired
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-48
Instruments and Controls
Location information about the
vehicle is only available if the GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed
and available.
On some vehicles, the mute button
can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
Universal Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑19 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
The vehicle must have a working
electrical system, including
Your Responsibility
adequate battery power, for the
OnStar equipment to operate. There
are other problems OnStar cannot
control that may prevent OnStar
from providing OnStar service at
any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important
parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,
tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
Increase the volume of the radio if
the OnStar advisor cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may
not be functioning properly.
Press Q and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear
(no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all
services have been deactivated.
OnStar Steering Wheel
Controls
Press Q to confirm that the OnStar
equipment is active.
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to interact
with OnStar hands-free calling.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 4‑6 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-49
Do not use the Universal Home
Remote with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop
and reverse feature. This includes
any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
When programming a garage door,
park outside of the garage. Park
directly in line with and facing the
garage door opener motor-head or
gate motor-head. Be sure that
people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate that is being
programmed.
Universal Remote System
Programming
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
Universal Home Remote. Because
of the steps involved, it may be
helpful to have another person
available to assist you with
programming the Universal Home
Remote.
It is recommended that a new
battery be installed in your
hand-held transmitter for quicker
and more accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal.
Programming the Universal
Home Remote System
Keep the original hand-held
transmitter for use in other vehicles
as well as for future Universal Home
Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the programmed
Universal Home Remote buttons
should be erased for security
purposes. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this
section.
If the vehicle has this feature, you
will see these buttons with one
square Light Emitting Diode (LED)
indicator light next to them in the
headliner.
For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or
go to www.homelink.com.
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-50
Instruments and Controls
.
If the Universal Home
Remote indicator light
blinks rapidly for
two seconds, then turns
to a constant light and the
garage door does not
move, continue with the
programming Steps 4
through 6.
To program up to three devices:
Some entry gates and garage
door openers may require
substitution of Step 2 with the
procedure noted in “Gate
Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this
section.
1. Hold the end of your hand-held
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm
(1 to 3 inches) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons
while keeping the indicator
light in view. The hand-held
transmitter was supplied by the
manufacturer of your garage
door opener receiver
3. Press and hold for five seconds
the newly-trained Universal
Home Remote button (selected
button from Step 2) while
It may be helpful to have
another person to assist
with the remaining Steps 4
through 6.
(motor-head unit).
observing the indicator light
and garage door activation.
2. At the same time, press and
hold both the hand-held
.
transmitter button and one of
the three Universal Home
Remote buttons to be used to
operate the garage door. Do not
release the Universal Home
Remote button or the hand-held
transmitter button until the
indicator light changes from a
slow to a rapidly flashing light.
You now may release both
buttons.
If the indicator light stays on
continuously or the garage
door starts to move when
the Universal Home
Remote button is pressed
and released, then the
programming is complete.
There is no need to
continue programming
Steps 4 through 6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-51
6. Immediately return to the
vehicle. Firmly press and hold
for two seconds the Universal
Home Remote button, selected
in Step 2 to control the garage
door, and then release it. If the
garage door does not move or
the lamp on the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head
unit) does not flash, press
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
If you have questions or need
help programming the Universal
Home Remote System,
call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go to
www.homelink.com.
Canadian radio-frequency laws
require transmitter signals to time
out or quit after several seconds
of transmission. This may not be
long enough for Universal Home
Remote to pick up the signal during
programming. Similarly, some U.S.
gate operators are manufactured to
time out in the same manner.
and hold the same button a
second time for two seconds,
and then release it. Again, if
the door does not move or
the garage door lamp does
not flash, press and hold the
same button a third time for
two seconds, and then release.
“Learn” or “Smart” Buttons
4. After Steps 1 through 3 have
been completed, locate the
“Learn” or “Smart” button inside
the garage on the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head
unit). The name and color of
the button may vary by
The Universal Home Remote should
now activate the garage door.
manufacturer.
To program the remaining
two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 1 of
“Programming the Universal
Home Remote System”.
5. Firmly press and release the
“Learn” or “Smart” button. After
you press this button, you will
have 30 seconds to complete
Step 6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-52
Instruments and Controls
If you live in Canada, or you are
having difficulty programming a gate
operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming Universal
Home Remote” procedures,
regardless of where you live,
replace Step 2 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” with the
following:
Reprogramming a Single
Universal Home Remote
Button
Universal Remote System
Operation
Using Universal Home Remote
To reprogram any of the three
Universal Home Remote buttons:
Press and hold the appropriate
Universal Home Remote button
for at least half of a second. The
indicator light will come on while
the signal is being transmitted.
1. Press and hold the desired
Universal Home Remote button.
Do not release the button.
2. Continue to press and hold the
Universal Home Remote button
while you press and release every
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held
transmitter button until the
2. The indicator light will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, proceed
with Step 1 of the section
“Programming Universal Home
Remote”.
Erasing Universal Home
Remote Buttons
All programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends.
frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The
Universal Home Remote indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under
“Programming Universal Home
Remote” to complete.
If you have questions or need
help programming the Universal
Home Remote System,
call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go to
www.homelink.com. You may also
call the customer assistance phone
number under Customer Assistance
Offices on page 12‑3.
To erase all programmed buttons on
the Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold down the
two outside buttons until the
indicator light begins to flash,
after 10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
5-1
It controls the following systems:
Exterior Lighting
Lighting
.
Headlamps
.
Exterior Lamp Controls
Taillamps
Exterior Lighting
.
Parking Lamps
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 5-1
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Daytime Running
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Fog Lamps
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 5-5
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
The exterior lamps control has
four positions:
O (Off): Briefly turn to this position
to turn the automatic light control off
or on again.
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the
headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with
the following:
The exterior lamps control is located
on the instrument panel to the
outboard side of the steering
column.
Interior Lighting
.
Parking Lamps
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2
Lighting
; (Parking Lamps): Turns the
parking lamps on together with the
following:
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
2 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam
Changer: Push the turn signal/lane
change lever away from you to turn
the high beams on.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
Pull the lever towards you to return
to low beams.
2 (Headlamps): Turns the
headlamps on together with the
following lamps listed below.
A warning chime sounds if the
driver's door is opened when the
ignition switch is off and the
headlamps are on.
A light sensor on top of the
instrument panel makes the DRL
work, so be sure it is not covered.
The DRL system makes the
low‐beam headlamps come on at a
reduced brightness or for vehicles
with High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps, the DRL lights will come
on when the following conditions
are met:
.
.
.
.
Parking Lamps
Taillamps
This indicator light turns on in the
instrument panel cluster when the
high beam headlamps are on.
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
.
The ignition is in the
Flash-to-Pass
The flash‐to‐pass feature works with
the low‐beams or Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) on or off.
# (Front Fog Lamps): For vehicles
with fog lamps, press to turn the
lamps on or off.
ON/RUN mode.
.
The exterior lamps control is
in AUTO.
See Front Fog Lamps on
page 5‑5
.
The engine is running.
.
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal/lane change lever all the
way towards you. Then release it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
5-3
When the DRL are on, only the
low‐beam headlamps, at a reduced
level of brightness, will be on. The
headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,
instrument panel and other lamps
will not be on.
To enable AFL, set the exterior
Automatic Headlamp
System
When it is dark enough outside and
the exterior lamps control is in the
automatic position, the headlamps
come on automatically. See Exterior
Lamp Controls on page 5‑1.
lamp control to the AUTO position.
Moving the control out of the AUTO
position will deactivate the system.
AFL will operate when the vehicle
speed is greater than 3 km/h
(2 mph). AFL will not operate when
the transmission is in R (Reverse).
AFL is not immediately operable
after starting the vehicle; driving
a short distance is required to
calibrate the AFL. See Exterior
Lamp Controls on page 5‑1.
The headlamps automatically
change from DRL to the regular
headlamps depending on the
darkness of the surroundings. The
other lamps that come on with the
headlamps will also come on.
The vehicle has a light sensor
located on top of the instrument
panel. Make sure it is not covered,
or the headlamps will be on when
they are not needed.
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps go off and the DRL
come on.
Curve Lighting
The system may also turn on the
headlamps when driving through a
parking garage or tunnel.
The Xenon light beam pivots based
on the steering wheel position and
vehicle speed of at least 10 km/h
(6 mph). The headlamps shine at an
angle of up to 15 degrees to the
right or left of the direction of travel.
To turn the DRL lamps off or on
again, turn the exterior lamps
control to the off position and then
release. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, the DRL lamps cannot be
turned off.
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL)
For vehicles with Xenon headlamps,
the Adaptive Forward Lighting
System (AFL) adjusts the
headlamps to provide greater road
illumination in various driving
conditions.
Motorway Lighting
If the vehicle is traveling straight
continuously at high speeds, the
light beam automatically raises
slightly to increase the headlamp
range.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4
Lighting
City Lighting
DRL. During that delay, the
instrument panel cluster may not be
as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control
is in full bright position. See
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 5‑6 for more
information.
Twilight Sentinel
If the vehicle speed is less than
50 km/h (31 mph), the headlamp
range is automatically reduced.
This feature automatically turns the
lamps on and off. A light sensor on
top of the instrument panel makes
the Twilight Sentinel® work, so be
sure it is not covered.
With Twilight Sentinel® the following
will happen:
Tourist Lighting
To help prevent headlamp glare for
oncoming drivers, when using left
hand drive vehicles in right hand
drive countries and vice versa, do
the following:
The vehicle can be idled with the
lamps off, even when it is dark
outside. After starting the vehicle,
turn the exterior lamp control to off,
then release it. The lamps will
remain off until the control is turned
to off again.
Twilight Sentinel® also provides
exterior illumination as you leave
the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel®
has turned on the lamps when the
ignition is turned off, the lamps
remain on until:
.
When it is dark enough outside,
the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) go off, and the headlamps
and parking lamps come on. The
other lamps that come on with
the headlamps also come on.
.
Pull and hold the turn signal/lane
change lever.
.
Turn on the ignition.
.
Wait 3 seconds, a signal will
.
When it is bright enough outside,
sound and the AFL control
indicator flashes for 4 seconds.
the headlamps go off, and the
DRL come on, as long as the
exterior lamp switch is in the
AUTO position.
.
Release the turn signal/lane
change lever.
If the vehicle is started in a dark
garage, the automatic headlamp
system comes on immediately. If it
is light outside when the vehicle
leaves the garage, there is a
The AFL control indicator flashes for
4 seconds each time the ignition is
turned on.
.
The exterior lamp control is
moved from O to the parking
lamp position, or
To deactivate tourist lighting, repeat
the steps above. The AFL control
indicator will not flash when tourist
lighting has been deactivated.
.
the delay time selected has
slight delay before the automatic
headlamp system changes to the
elapsed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
5-5
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 4‑41 to select the delay time.
You can also select no delay time.
The lever returns to its starting
position when it is released.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
If after signaling a turn or lane
If the ignition is turned off with the
exterior lamp control in the parking
lamp or headlamp position, the
Twilight Sentinel® delay will not
occur. The lamps will turn off as
soon as the control is turned off.
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned-out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 9‑44 for more information.
The regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
Front Fog Lamps
Hazard Warning Flashers
Front Fog Lamp
| Hazard Warning Flasher:
Press this button located on the
instrument panel near the audio
system, to make the front and rear
turn signal lamps flash on and off.
This warns others that you are
having trouble. Press again to turn
the flashers off.
For vehicles with front fog lamps,
the button is located on the exterior
lamp control, on the outboard side
of the steering wheel.
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
The ignition and the low‐beam
headlamps must be on to turn on
the fog lamps.
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. The turn signal flashes
three times.
# : Press to turn the fog lamps on
or off. An indicator light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on
when the fog lamps are on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-6
Lighting
The fog lamps come on together
with the parking lamps.
Dome Lamps
To change the dome lamp settings,
press the following:
Interior Lighting
If the high‐beam headlamps are
turned on, the fog lamps will turn off.
If the high‐beam headlamps are
turned off, the fog lamps will turn
back on again.
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
This feature controls the brightness
of the instrument panel lights. The
thumbwheel is located next to the
exterior lamp control.
* (Dome Lamp Override): Turns
the lamp off, even when a door
is open.
1 (Door): The lamp comes on
automatically when a door is
opened.
In Scandinavian countries, the front
fog lamps will turn off while the
low-beam or high‐beam headlamps
are in use.
D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): Turn the thumbwheel
up or down to brighten or dim the
instrument panel lights.
+ (On): Turns the dome lamp on.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
Reading Lamps
There are reading lamps located on
the overhead console and over the
rear passenger doors. These lamps
come on automatically when any
door is opened.
Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamp is located over the
rear compartment and is controlled
by the dome lamp. See Dome
Lamps on page 5‑6.
To manually turn the reading lamps
on or off:
Courtesy Lamps
For the overhead console reading
lamps, press the button next to
each lamp.
The courtesy lamps come on
automatically when any door is
opened and the dome lamp is in the
door position.
For the rear passenger reading
lamps, press the lamp lens.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-1
Audio Players
Introduction
Read the following pages to
become familiar with the audio
system's features.
Infotainment
System
CD Player (Radio
with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Mass Storage
Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Auxiliary Devices (Radio
with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Auxiliary Devices (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM) . . . . . . . . 6-34
Introduction
WARNING
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 6-2
Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 6-3
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD
and MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
{
Taking your eyes off the road
for extended periods could
cause a crash resulting in injury
or death to you or others. Do
not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
Rear Seat Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Radio
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
This system provides access to
many audio and non audio listings.
Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 6-47
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Bluetooth (Navigation) . . . . . . . 6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2
Infotainment System
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
Notice: Contact your dealer/
retailer before adding any
equipment.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate Navigation
System manual.
.
Become familiar with the
Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
the operation of the vehicle's
engine, radio, or other systems,
and could damage them. Follow
federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone equipment.
operation and controls of the
audio system.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
.
Set up the tone, speaker
The theft-deterrent feature works
by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) to
the infotainment system. The
infotainment system does not
operate if it is stolen or moved to a
different vehicle.
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.
For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 8‑3.
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 8‑18 for more
information.
This vehicle's infotainment system
may be equipped with a noise
reduction system which can work
improperly if the audio amplifier,
engine calibrations, exhaust system,
microphones, radio, or speakers are
modified or replaced. This could
result in more noticeable engine
noise at certain speeds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-3
Overview (Radio with CD)
A. VOL/ O
.
Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. Buttons 1 to 6
.
Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
C. TUNE
.
Radio: Manually selects
radio stations.
.
CD: Selects tracks.
D. FAV
.
Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
E. g SEEK
.
Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
.
CD: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4
Infotainment System
O. PHONE
F. l SEEK
J. k
.
Opens the phone
.
.
Radio: Seeks the next
CD: Pauses the CD.
main menu.
station.
K. CD Slot
.
Mutes the audio system.
.
CD: Selects the next track
or fast forwards within a
track.
.
Insert a CD.
P. TONE
L. MENU/SELECT
.
Opens the tone menu.
.
Press: Selects menu items.
G. Z CD Eject
Q. AUX
.
Turn: Opens menus,
highlights menu items,
or sets numeric values
while in a menu.
.
Removes a disc from the
.
Selects a connected
external audio source.
CD slot.
H. CD
R. INFO
.
Selects the CD player when
listening to a different audio
source.
.
Radio: Shows available
information about the
current station.
M. 0 BACK
.
Menu: Moves one
level back.
I. RADIO/BAND
.
CD: Shows available
information about the
current track.
.
Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
.
Changes the band while
listening to the radio.
N. CONFIG
.
Selects the radio when
listening to a different audio
source.
.
Open the settings menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-5
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)
A. VOL/ O
.
Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. Buttons 1 to 6
.
Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
.
MEM: Saves and selects
favorite tracks and playlists.
C. TUNE/INFO
.
Radio: Manually selects
radio stations and shows
available information about
the current station.
.
.
CD: Selects tracks and
shows available information
about the current track.
MEM: Selects tracks and
shows available information
about the current track.
D. FAV
.
Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
.
MEM: Opens the
favorites list.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6
Infotainment System
E. g SEEK
G. Z CD Eject
J. k
.
.
.
Radio: Seeks the previous
Removes a disc from the
Radio: Pauses time shifted
content.
station.
CD slot.
.
.
.
CD/DVD: Selects the
previous track or rewinds
within a track.
H. RADIO/BAND
CD/DVD: Pauses
CD/DVD‐A and DVD‐V
playback. Stops DVD‐V
playback.
.
Changes the band while
listening to the radio.
MEM: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
.
Selects the radio when
listening to a different audio
source.
.
MEM: Pauses MEM
playback.
K. CD/DVD Slot
F. l SEEK
I. MEM/DVD/AUX
.
Insert a disc.
.
.
Radio: Seeks the next
Selects MEM, CD/DVD,
station.
USB, or a connected
auxillary audio or auxillary
audio/video source.
L. MENU/SELECT
.
.
.
CD/DVD: Selects the next
track or fast forwards within
a track.
Press: Selects menu items.
.
Turn: Open menus,
highlights menu items,
or sets numeric values
while in a menu.
MEM: Selects the next
track or fast forwards within
a track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-7
M. TONE
For vehicles without OnStar®, press
PHONE to mute the infotainment
system. Press PHONE again,
Operation
.
Opens the tone menu.
Controls
N. 0 BACK
or turn the VOL/ O knob to
The infotainment system is
cancel mute.
.
operated by using the pushbuttons,
multifunction knobs, menus that are
shown on the display, and steering
wheel controls, if equipped.
Menu: Moves one
level back.
Menu System
.
Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
Controls
The MENU/SELECT knob and
Turning the System On or Off
O. CONFIG
the 0 BACK button are used to
navigate the menu system.
.
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press to
turn the system on and off.
Open the settings menu.
P. DEL
MENU/SELECT: Press to:
Automatic Switch‐Off
.
MEM: Delete the current
track from MEM.
.
Select or activate the highlighted
If the infotainment system has
been turned on after the ignition is
turned off, the system will turn off
automatically after ten minutes.
menu option.
.
Q. O REC
Confirm a set value.
.
.
CD/DVD: Records content
Turn a system setting on or off.
from audio CDs and
MP3/WMA CDs.
Turn to:
Volume Control
.
Enter the menu system.
.
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn to
adjust the volume.
AUX: Records content from
USB mass storage devices.
.
Highlight a menu option.
.
PHONE: For vehicles with
Select a value.
R. PHONE
OnStar®, press and hold PHONE to
mute the infotainment system. Press
and hold PHONE again, or turn the
.
Opens the phone
main menu.
.
Mutes the audio system.
VOL/ O knob to cancel mute.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8
Infotainment System
Submenus
Setting a Value
0 BACK: Press to:
.
Exit a menu.
.
Return from a submenu screen
to the previous menu screen.
.
Delete the last character in a
sequence.
Selecting a Menu Option
An arrow on the right‐hand edge of
the menu indicates that it has a
submenu with other options.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
change the current value of the
setting.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT
button to confirm the setting.
Activating a Setting
Turning a Function On or Off
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
move the highlighted bar.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT
button to select the highlighted
option.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the setting.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT
button to activate the setting.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the function.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT
button to turn the function on
or off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-9
Entering a Character Sequence
3. Press and hold the
MENU/SELECT button
until the value changes to 0.
Adjusting the Fader and Balance
Press the 0 BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,
and Bass
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the character.
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select Fader or Balance.
3. Select the value.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT
button to select the character.
Press the 0 BACK button to go
Press the 0 BACK button to delete
the last character in the sequence
or press and hold to delete the
entire character sequence.
back to the Tone Settings menu.
Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)
For vehicles that have an equalizer:
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select EQ.
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select Treble, Midrange,
or Bass.
Audio Settings
3. Select the value.
The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
player source.
Press the 0 BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
3. Select the setting.
Press the 0 BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
To quickly reset an audio setting
value to 0:
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select the audio setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-10
Infotainment System
.
5.1 Surround ‐ The infotainment
system used in conjunction with
the Bose® 5.1 Cabin Surround®
sound system for the vehicle
includes digital 5.1 decoding.
This technology unlocks the full
benefit of digital 5.1 recordings,
so digitally encoded music
and movie soundtracks can
be presented faithfully and
accurately. If the video screens
or Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is on,
5.1 Surround is not available.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
Settings
System Settings
Configuring the Number of
Favorite Pages
For vehicles with DSP, it is used to
provide a choice of different
listening experiences.
.
2.0 Normal ‐ Select this setting
to adjust the audio for normal
mode. This provides the best
sound quality for all seating
positions.
To configure the number of available
favorite pages:
Centerpoint ‐ Centerpoint®
.
signal processing circuitry. This
setting creates a surround sound
listening experience from stereo
CDs and satellite radio.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Radio Favorites.
To adjust the DSP settings:
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select DSP.
For more information on
Bose® Centerpoint® signal
processing circuitry, please visit
www. bose.com/centerpoint.
4. Select the number of available
favorite pages.
3. Select the setting.
Press the 0 BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
5. Press the 0 BACK button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-11
Auto Volume
Maximum Startup Volume
Radio
The auto volume feature
The maximum volume played when
the radio is first turned on can
be set.
automatically adjusts the radio
volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
or slows down, so that the volume
level is consistent.
AM-FM Radio
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
radio are:
The level of volume compensation
can be selected, or the auto volume
feature can be turned off.
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
radio on and choose between AM,
FM, and XM™, if equipped.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
MENU/SELECT: Press and turn to
navigate the available menus.
TUNE: Turn to search for stations.
3. Select Maximum Startup
Volume.
INFO: Press to display additional
information that may be available for
the current song.
4. Select the setting.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Auto Volume.
4. Select the setting.
5. Press the 0 BACK button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
l SEEK/ g SEEK: Press to
search for stations.
FAV: Press to open the
favorites list.
1 to 6: Press to select preset
stations.
5. Press the 0 BACK button
to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
k (Play/Pause): Press to pause
time shifted content, if equipped.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-12
Infotainment System
Seek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVD
and MEM)
RDS (Radio Data System)
Selecting a Band
The radio may have RDS. The RDS
feature is available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This feature only works
when the information from the radio
station is available. In rare cases,
a radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio
station.
Press the RADIO/BAND button
to choose AM, FM, or XM™,
if equipped. The last station that
was playing starts playing again.
Briefly press g SEEK or l SEEK,
to automatically search for the next
available station. If a station is not
found, the radio switches to a more
sensitive search level. If a station
still is not found, the frequency that
was last active begins to play.
Selecting a Station
Seek Tuning (Radio with CD)
If the radio station is not known:
Manual Tuning
Briefly press g SEEK or l SEEK.
To automatically search for the next
available station. If a station is not
found, the radio switches to a more
sensitive search level. If a station
still is not found, the frequency that
was last active begins to play.
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
frequency on the display.
While the radio is tuned to an
FM-RDS station, the station name
or call letters display.
Favorites List
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Favorites List.
3. Select the station.
Radio Menus
Radio menus are available for AM
and FM.
If the radio station is known:
Press and hold g SEEK or
l SEEK until the station on the
display is reached, then release the
button.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
open the main radio menu for that
frequency.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-13
Station Lists
3. Select the programming type.
A list of stations that transmit
programming of the selected
type displays.
Storing a Station as a Favorite
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
Stations from all bands can be
stored in any order in the favorite
pages.
2. Select AM or FM Station List. All
receivable stations in the current
reception area are displayed. If a
station list has not been created,
an automatic station search
is done.
4. Select the station.
Up to six stations can be stored in
each favorite page and the number
of available favorite pages can
be set.
The category lists are updated
when the station lists are
updated.
3. Select the station.
Updating Station & Category Lists
Storing Stations
Category Lists
If stations stored in the station list
can no longer be received.
To store the station to a position in
the list, press the corresponding
button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.
Most stations that broadcast an
RDS program type code specify the
type of programming transmitted.
Some stations change the program
type code depending on the
content. The system stores the
RDS stations sorted by program
type in the FM category list.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
Retrieving Stations
2. Select Update AM or FM Station
List, if the stations stored in
the station list are no longer
received. A station search will be
completed and the first station in
the updated list will play.
Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to switch to another
favorite page. Briefly press one of
the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the
station.
To search for a programming type
determined by station:
To cancel the station search, press
the MENU/SELECT knob.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select FM category list. A list of
all programing types available
displays.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-14
Infotainment System
Time Shifting (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM)
Hold l SEEK until the end of
the recorded buffer resumes live
playback.
Satellite Radio
Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite
Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite
Radio subscription can receive XM
programming.
The radio with MEM time shift
feature can rewind 20 minutes of
FM/AM content. While listening to
the radio, the content from the
current station is always being
buffered.
Press and release the g SEEK or
l SEEK buttons to jump forward or
back 30 seconds in the time shift
buffer.
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that
is based in the 48 contiguous
United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has
a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
sound. A service fee is required to
receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at
When the radio station is changed,
the buffer is cleared and
automatically restarted for the
current station. Content from a
previously tuned station is no
longer available.
Press the k button to pause the
radio. The radio displays the time
shift status bar. The status bar
shows the amount of content that is
stored in the buffer and the current
pause point.
The time shift feature is not
available while recording or with
other sources of playback.
To resume playback from the
current pause point, press
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.
and www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
the k button again. The radio
is no longer live, but played from
the time shift buffer. A status bar
displays below the station number.
Pausing AM/FM with the Vehicle
Turned Off
If AM/FM is paused when the
vehicle is turned off, the radio
continues to buffer the current radio
station for up to 20 minutes. If the
vehicle is turned back on within
20 minutes, the radio resumes
playback from the paused point.
Press and hold the g SEEK or
l SEEK buttons to fast forward or
rewind through the time shift buffer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-15
Selecting a Channel Using
Control Buttons
XM Categories
g SEEK or l SEEK
The buttons used to control the XM
radio are:
XM channels are organized in
categories.
(Radio with CD)
.
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
radio on and choose between AM,
FM, and XM™, if equipped.
Press and release g SEEK or
l SEEK to go to the previous
or next channel.
Removing or Adding Categories
Channels in a category that
have been removed can still be
g SEEK / l SEEK: Press to go
.
Press and hold g SEEK or
l SEEK to scroll through the
previous or next channel until
the channel is reached.
accessed by using the g SEEK
or l SEEK buttons, or the
TUNE knob.
to the previous or next channel.
FAV: Press to open the
favorites list.
To add or remove categories:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select XM Categories.
1‐6: Press to select a favorite.
TUNE: Turn to select channel.
Selecting a Channel Using
g SEEK or l SEEK (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM)
INFO: Press to display additional
information that may be available
about the current song.
Press and release g SEEK or
l SEEK to go to the previous or
next channel.
4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the category.
k (Play/Pause): Press to pause
time shifted content, if equipped.
5. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to remove or add the category.
Selecting a Channel Using the
TUNE Knob
Selecting the XM Band
Selecting an XM Channel
To select an XM channel using the
TUNE knob:
Press the RADIO/BAND button to
choose between the AM, FM and
XM bands. The last channel played
in that band begins to play when
that band is selected.
XM channels can be selected by
Turn the TUNE knob to highlight an
XM channel, the channel is selected
after a short delay.
using g SEEK, l SEEK, the
TUNE knob, or the menu system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-16
Infotainment System
To select a channel using the menu:
Storing a Channel as a Favorite
To resume playback from the
current pause point, press the
k button again. The radio is no
longer live, but played from the time
shift buffer. A status bar displays
below the channel number.
1. Turn the menu knob and select
Channel List.
To store the channel to a position
in the list, press and hold the
corresponding 1 to 6 button until the
channel can be heard again.
2. Select the desired channel.
Selecting a Channel Using the
Menu System
Retrieving Channels
Press and hold the g SEEK or
l SEEK buttons to fast forward or
rewind through the time shift buffer.
Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to change to
another favorite page. Briefly press
one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve
the channel.
1. Turn the menu knob.
2. Select XM Category List.
3. Select the category.
4. Select the channel.
Hold l SEEK until the end of the
recorded buffer resumes live
playback.
Time Shifting (Radio with
CD/DVD and MEM)
Press and release the g SEEK or
l SEEK buttons to go to the next
or previous song in the time shift
buffer.
Storing an XM Channel as a
Favorite
The radio with MEM time shift
feature can rewind 20 minutes of
XM content. While listening to the
radio, the content from the current
channel is always being buffered.
Channels from all bands can be
stored in any order in the favorite
pages.
When the channel is changed, the
buffer is cleared and automatically
restarted for the current channel.
Content from a previously tuned
station is no longer available.
Up to six channels can be stored in
each favorite page and the number
of available favorite pages can
be set.
Press the k button to pause the
radio. The radio displays the time
shift status bar. The status bar
shows the amount of content that is
stored in the buffer and the current
pause point.
The time shift feature is not
available while recording or with
other sources of playback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-17
Pausing XM with the Vehicle
Turned Off
Channel Unauth : This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with
your XM Subscription package.
No XM Signal: The system is
working properly. The vehicle may
be in a location that where the XM
signal is being blocked. When the
vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
If XM is paused when the vehicle is
turned off, the radio continues to
buffer the current radio station for
up to 20 minutes. If the vehicle is
turned back on within 20 minutes,
the radio resumes playback from the
paused point.
Channel Unavailable: This
previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another
station.
CAT Not Found: The system is
working properly. There are no
channels available for the selected
category.
No Artist Info: The system is
working properly. No artist
information is available at this
time on this channel.
XM Messages
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message alternates with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the
service.
XL (Explicit Language
No Title Info: The system is
working properly. No song title
information is available at this time
on this channel.
Channels): These channels, or any
others, can be blocked by request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code
in the receiver is being updated, no
action is required. This process
should take no longer than
30 seconds.
Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No CAT Info: The system is
working properly. No category
information is available at this time
on this channel.
Check Antenna: If this message
does not clear within a short
period of time, the receiver could
have a fault. Consult with your
dealer/retailer.
No Information: The system is
working properly. No text or
informational messages are
available at this time on this
channel.
Loading XM: The audio system is
acquiring and processing audio and
text data, no action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-18
Infotainment System
XM Not Available: If this message
does not clear within a short
period of time, the receiver could
have a fault. Consult with your
dealer/retailer.
AM
Cellular Phone Usage
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with
each other. Static can occur when
things like storms and power lines
interfere with radio reception. When
this happens, try reducing the treble
on the radio.
Cellular phone usage can cause
interference with the vehicle's radio.
Multi-Band Antenna
Radio Reception
The multi-band antenna is located
on the roof of the vehicle. The
antenna is used for the AM/FM
radio, OnStar, the XM Satellite
Radio Service System, and GPS
(Global Positioning System); if the
vehicle has these features. Keep
the antenna clear of obstructions
for clear reception. If the vehicle
has a sunroof and it is open, the
performance of the AM/FM radio,
OnStar, XM system, and GPS can
be affected.
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power
outlet.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
digital radio reception from
coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just
as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and
out. In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
FM
FM signals only reach about 16 to
65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
that automatically works to reduce
interference, some static can occur,
especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in
and out.
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-19
If the bottom surface of a disc is
dirty, take a soft lint free cloth,
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a
mild neutral detergent solution
mixed with water, and clean it.
Wipe the disc from the center to
the outer edge.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD
at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
Audio Players
CD Player
(Radio with CD)
The CD player can play audio CDs
and MP3 CDs.
Care of the CD Player
Control Buttons
The CD player will not play
8 cm (3 in) CDs.
Do not add a label to a disc, as it
could get caught in the CD player.
If a label is needed, label the top
of the recorded disc with a
marking pen.
The buttons used to control the CD
player are:
Care of CDs
CD: Press to use the CD player.
Sound quality can be reduced due
to disc quality, recording method,
quality of the music recorded, and
how the disc has been handled.
Handle discs carefully and store
them in their original cases or other
protective cases away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the bottom
surface of a disc is damaged, the
disc may not play properly or at all.
Do not touch the bottom surface of
a disc while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
l SEEK/g SEEK: Press to
select tracks or to fast forward or
rewind within a track.
Do not use disc lens cleaners
because they could contaminate the
lens of the disc optics and damage
the CD player.
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the current track
that may be available.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
TUNE: Turn to select tracks.
MENU/SELECT: Turn to enter the
menu, press to select an item.
Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.
k : Press to pause a CD or MP3
track, press again to resume
playback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-20
Infotainment System
Selecting a CD Track
Selecting an MP3 Track
Inserting a CD
Using the control buttons:
Using the control buttons:
With the printed side facing up,
insert a disc into the CD slot until it
is drawn in.
.
.
Press the g SEEK or l SEEK
Press the g SEEK or l SEEK
button to select the previous or
next track.
button to select the previous or
next track.
Removing a CD
.
.
Turn the TUNE knob.
Turn the TUNE knob.
Press the Z button.
Using the CD Menu:
Using the CD Menu:
The disc is pushed out of the
CD slot.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Tracks list.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Playlists / Folders.
3. Select the playlist or folder.
4. Select the track.
If the disc is not removed after it is
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
few seconds.
3. Select the track.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Playing a CD or MP3 CD
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
then set Shuffle Songs to On.
Searching for MP3 Tracks
Press the CD button, if there is a
disc in the player, it begins playing.
The search feature may take some
time to display the information after
reading the disc due to the amount
of information stored on the disc.
FM automatically plays while the
disc is being read.
Fast Forward and Rewind
Information about the disc and
current track is shown on the
display depending on the data
stored.
Press and hold l SEEK or
g SEEK to fast forward or rewind
within the current track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-21
Tracks can be searched by:
Care of CDs and DVDs
Care of the CD/DVD Player
.
Playlists
Sound quality can be reduced due
to disc quality, recording method,
quality of the music recorded, and
how the disc has been handled.
Handle discs carefully and store
them in their original cases or other
protective cases away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the bottom
surface of a disc is damaged, the
disc may not play properly or at all.
Do not touch the bottom surface of
a disc while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Do not add a label to a disc, as it
could get caught in the CD/DVD
player. If a label is needed, label
the top of the recorded disc with a
marking pen.
.
Artists
.
Albums
.
Song Titles
Do not use disc lens cleaners
because they could contaminate the
lens of the disc optics and damage
the CD/DVD player.
.
Genres
.
Folder View
To search for tracks:
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Genres,
or Folder View.
If the bottom surface of a disc is
dirty, take a soft lint free cloth,
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a
mild neutral detergent solution
mixed with water, and clean it.
Wipe the disc from the center to
the outer edge.
4. Select the track.
CD/DVD Player
The CD/DVD player can play
CDs, DVD‐As, MP3/WMA CDs,
MP3/WMA DVDs, and DVD‐Vs.
The CD/DVD player will not play
8 cm (3 in) discs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-22
Infotainment System
Using the menu:
Control Buttons
Removing a CD or DVD
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Tracks List.
3. Select the track.
The buttons used to control the
CD/DVD player are:
Press the Z button.
The disc is pushed out of the
CD/DVD slot.
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to choose
between the MEM, CD/DVD,
and AUX.
If the disc is not removed after it is
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
few seconds.
Pausing a CD or DVD‐A Track
l SEEK/ g SEEK : Press to
select tracks or to fast forward or
rewind within a track.
Press the k button to pause a CD
or DVD‐A track. Press the k button
again to continue playing the track.
Playing a CD or DVD‐A Disc
Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button
if there is a disc in the player, it
begins playing.
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the disc that may
be available.
Playing CD or DVD‐A Tracks in
Random Order
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
then set Shuffle Songs to On.
Information about the disc and
current track is shown on the
display depending on the data
stored.
TUNE: Turn to select tracks.
MENU/SELECT: Turn to enter the
menu and press to select an item.
Fast Forward and Rewind
Press and hold l SEEK or
g SEEK to fast forward or rewind
within the current track.
Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.
Selecting CD or DVD‐A Tracks
k : Press to pause a CD, DVD‐A,
or DVD‐V, press again to resume
playback. Press and hold to stop a
DVD‐V disc.
Using the control buttons:
.
Press the g SEEK or l SEEK
button to select the previous or
next track.
Inserting a CD or DVD
.
Turn the TUNE knob.
With the printed side facing up,
insert a disc into the slot until it is
drawn in.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-23
Searching for MP3s on a CD
or DVD
To search for tracks:
Playing an MP3 CD or DVD
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
Files that are not stored in
folders are displayed in the root
directory (disc).
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the disc
due to the amount of information
stored on the disc. The infotainment
system automatically switches to
FM while the disc is being read.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, or Genres.
The search rate increases if
the MENU/SELECT knob is
continuously turned while searching
in a list.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the menu knob is
continuously turned while
searching in a list.
Selecting an MP3 Track
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display
as Unknown.
Using the control buttons:
Playing MP3 Tracks in Random
Order
.
Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
select the previous or next track.
Tracks can be searched for by:
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
then set Shuffle Songs to On.
.
Playlists
.
Turn the TUNE knob.
.
Artists
Recording an Audio or
MP3 CD to MEM
Using the CD or DVD Menu:
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Folder List.
.
Albums
.
See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
page 6‑25 for more information.
Song Titles
.
Genres
3. Select the folder.
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
4. Select the track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-24
Infotainment System
.
.
.
Cursor RIGHT
Cursor LEFT
Up Menu
Changing the Audio Stream
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Audio Stream.
Playing a DVD‐V
See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 6‑36 for
information about how to control a
Video DVD using the wireless
remote control.
Use the following actions to
navigate the menu on a DVD‐V
Disc while playing chapters.
3. Select Change Audio Stream.
4. Press MENU/SELECT to change
the selection.
Selecting a Chapter
.
Pause (Play)
Select Cancel to exit the menu.
Using the control buttons:
.
Chapter List
Pausing a DVD
.
.
Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
select the previous or next
chapter.
Title List
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
.
DVD/DVD — DVD on both video
screens
2. Select Pause, to pause the disc.
Select unpause to start
playback.
.
Turn the TUNE knob.
.
DVD/AUX — Left video
screen / Right AUX input
Using DVD Menu:
Navigating the DVD‐V Disc Menu
.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Chapter List.
3. Select the chapter.
AUX/DVD — Left AUX
input / Right video screen
Use the following actions to
navigate the title menu on a
DVD‐V Disc.
.
AUX/AUX — AUX input on both
video screens
.
Selecting a Title
Select / Enter
To navigate the menu:
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select the action.
.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Title List.
Cursor UP
.
Cursor DOWN
3. Select the title.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-25
INFO: Press to display additional
information about the MEM track
that may be available. Turn to select
tracks.
Recording to MEM
Mass Storage
Media (MEM)
Press O REC, then select “Record
Current Song” or “Record All Songs
on Disc”. If the track has started
playing, the system will restart the
track and begin recording from the
beginning of the track. When the
song recording is completed, the
message “Song Recorded to MEM”
displays, and there may be a slight
pause.
Infotainment systems with MEM
storage are able to record up to
1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music from
Audio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs,
and USB storage devices. The MEM
player can also time shift audio from
AM, FM, and XM™ radio.
k : Press to pause the track
currently playing, press again to
resume playback.
O REC: Press to record music
from a CD or USB drive.
DEL: Press to delete the current
track from MEM.
Music or content that is stored
in MEM that you did not create,
or have the right to distribute, must
be deleted before the sale or end of
the lease of the vehicle.
Songs recorded to MEM are stored
as the current date, disc and track
number.
FAV (Favorites): Press to display
MEM favorites.
1 to 6: Press to select a track or
playlist stored in that numeric
position.
Re-recording a Previously
Recorded Disc
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
MEM player are:
If the disc or track has already been
recorded to MEM, the message
“The Song(s) is Already Recorded”
displays.
Recording From Audio CDs
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to select
the MEM player.
The infotainment system can record
the current song playing or all songs
from an audio CD to MEM. A status
bar appears on the top of the
display when the recording process
starts and disappears when the
process has ended. Copy protected
CDs cannot be recorded to MEM.
l SEEK/ g SEEK: Press to
select tracks or to fast forward or
rewind within a track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-26
Infotainment System
Stopping the Recording
Stopping the Recording
Recording From MP3/WMA
Discs or USB Storage Devices
Press the O REC button while
recording from an audio CD to
display the stop recording option.
Select “Stop Recording Song
to MEM”.
Press the O REC button while
recording from an MP3/WMA CD or
USB storage device to display the
stop recording option. Select “Stop
Recording Song to MEM”
USB Host Support
The USB connector uses the USB
standards, 1.1 and 2.0.
USB Supported Devices
Renaming Recorded Discs
Deleting Tracks From MEM
.
USB Flash Drives
Discs that have been recorded to
MEM can be renamed.
Individual tracks and all tracks can
be deleted from MEM.
.
Portable USB Hard Drives
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Rename Recorded Discs.
3. Select the disc.
Recording to MEM
To delete individual tracks, press
and release the DEL button while
the track is playing.
Press O REC, then select “Record
Current Song” or “ Record All Songs
on Disc”.
To delete all tracks from MEM,
press and hold the DEL button while
a track is playing.
4. Select Album or Artist to rename
either one.
The information stored by MEM is
titled according to the ID3 tag
associated with it.
5. Use the menu knob to enter
the character sequence. See
Operation on page 6‑7 for
more information.
Re-recording a Previously
Recorded Disc
If the disc or track has already been
recorded to MEM the message
“The Song(s) is Already Recorded”
displays.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-27
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
Playing From MEM
Configuring MEM Favorites
During MEM playback, press the
FAV button to change between
favorite categories. The favorite
categories are:
Playing Back a Previously
Recorded CD
To search for tracks:
Turn the TUNE knob to select a
track if MEM is already playing from
the previously recorded disc.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
.
Playlists
.
Artists
1. Select Recorded Disc List.
2. Select the disc.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, or Genres.
.
Albums
.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the MENU/SELECT
knob is continuously turned
while searching in a list.
Genres
3. Select the track.
To remove MEM favorites
categories:
Searching For a Track
Tracks can be searched for by:
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select MEM Favorites.
.
Shuffle Songs
Playlists
.
Select the Shuffle Songs option
from the MEM menu to randomly
play back tracks stored in MEM.
Artists
.
Albums
4. Remove the check mark from
the box to remove that MEM
favorites category.
.
Song Titles
.
Genres
Replace the check mark to re-add
the removed category.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-28
Infotainment System
Creating Playlists
Saving MEM Tracks as
Favorites
Auxiliary Devices
(Radio with CD)
The optional AUX input allows
portable devices to connect to the
vehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
input jack, the USB port or
Bluetooth® wireless technology,
if equipped.
To create a playlist using tracks
stored in MEM:
Favorites can be saved by
pressing and holding one of
the 1 to 6 buttons. Favorites can be
stored according to the following list:
1. Select Playlist from the MEM
favorites.
2. Select the track to be stored in
the playlist.
Playlist: Adds currently playing
track to the playlist selected.
3. Press and hold one of
the 1 to 6 buttons until the
track can be heard again to
store the track.
Artist: Saves the artist associated
with the currently playing track in
the indicated favorites position.
Portable devices are controlled by
using the menu system described in
Operation on page 6‑7.
Album: Saves the album
associated with the currently playing
track in the indicated favorites
position.
4. Repeat steps 1 though 3 to store
additional tracks in the playlist.
Genre: Saves the genre associated
with the currently playing track in
the indicated favorites position.
The AUX input is located in the
center console.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-29
Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,
and Zunes are compatible with the
infotainment system.
To search for tracks:
3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the 3.5 mm auxiliary input jack to
use a portable audio player.
Connecting and Controlling
an iPod™
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,
Audiobooks, or Composers.
Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary
input jack can only be controlled
using the controls on the device.
Not all iPod's can be controlled by
the infotainment system.
4. Select the track.
Connecting an iPod
Shuffle
Adjusting the Volume
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
volume of the infotainment system
after the volume level has been set
on the portable audio device.
Searching For a Track
or Off, then press the 0 BACK
button to return the main screen.
Tracks can be searched for by:
.
Playlists
On: Plays tracks in the current
folder in random order.
.
USB Port
Artists
.
For vehicles with a USB port, the
following devices may be connected
and controlled by the infotainment
system.
Albums
Off: Plays tracks in the current
folder in sequential order.
.
Song Titles
.
Podcasts
Repeat
.
.
Genres
iPods
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Repeat to On or Off, then press
.
.
Audiobooks
PlaysForSure Devices (PFD)
the 0 BACK button to return the
main screen.
.
.
Composers
USB Drives
.
Zunes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-30
Infotainment System
On: Repeats the current track.
To search for tracks:
Connecting and Controlling a
USB Drive
Off: Playback starts from the
beginning of the current track after
the last track finishes.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
The infotainment system can only
play back .mp3 and .wma files from
a USB drive.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts,
or Genres.
Connecting and Controlling a
PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
or Zune™
Only the first 2,500 songs are
recognized on the device.
4. Select the track.
When a device is not supported, the
message “No supported data found.
You can safely disconnect the
device” appears.
Connecting a PFD or Zune
Shuffle Functionality
Connect the PFD or Zune to the
USB port.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
or Off.
Searching For a Track
Connecting a USB Drive
On: Plays current tracks in random
order.
Tracks can be searched for by:
Connect the USB drive to the
USB port.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Playlists
Artists
Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
Searching For a Track
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the device
due to the amount of information
stored.
Albums
Repeat Functionality
Song Titles
Podcasts
Genres
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Repeat to On or Off.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display as
Unknown.
track.
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-31
Connecting a Bluetooth®
Device
Tracks can be searched for by:
Shuffle Functionality
.
Playlists*
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
or Off.
.
.
.
.
.
Before a Bluetooth device can
Artists
be connected to the infotainment
system, it must first be paired to the
system. Not all Bluetooth devices
can be paired to the infotainment
system. Before pairing the Bluetooth
device, become familiar with its
user guide for Bluetooth functions.
The system only connects to
Albums
On: Plays current tracks in random
order.
Song Titles
Genres
Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
Folder View
Repeat Functionality
*This only displays if a playlist is
found on the device.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Repeat to On or Off.
Bluetooth devices that support
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile) version 1.2.
To search for tracks:
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
A Bluetooth phone with MP3
capability can not be paired to the
vehicle as a phone and an MP3
player at the same time.
Repeat Off: Playback starts from
the beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Genres,
or Folder View.
4. Select the track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-32
Infotainment System
Pairing Information:
Bluetooth Setup Menu
To select the Bluetooth Music Setup
menu when a Bluetooth device is
connected and active:
.
Up to five devices can be paired
The Bluetooth Setup menu can be
accessed with or without a device
attached to the USB port.
to the system.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.
Pairing a Device
.
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
To select the Bluetooth Setup menu
when a device is attached to the
USB port and active:
.
The infotainment system
automatically links with the
first available paired device in
the order the device was paired.
1. Select Connect To New Device
from the Bluetooth Music
Setup menu.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
while in the iPod, Zune, PFD,
or USB device main menu.
.
Only one paired device can be
2. The system asks a series of
Yes/No questions to determine
what type of device is being
paired.
connected to the infotainment
system at a time.
2. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.
To select the Bluetooth Music Setup
menu when a device is not attached
to the USB port, or when a device is
attached to the USB port but not
active:
.
Pairing should only need to be
completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the device is
deleted.
3. After the system determines
what type of Bluetooth device is
being paired, the Bluetooth
device will need to be put into
discovery mode.
1. Press the AUX button until AUX
is the active source.
2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
3. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-33
4. Some devices may require a
PIN number in order to complete
the pairing process. Locate the
device named “GMusicConnect”
in the list on the Bluetooth
device and follow the
To connect a paired device when
another device is connected to the
infotainment system:
Changing the Default PIN
To change the default PIN:
1. Select Change Default PIN from
the Bluetooth Music
1. Select the Select Device option
from the Bluetooth Music
Setup menu.
Setup menu.
instructions on the device to
enter the four digit PIN number
provided by the infotainment
system.
2. Select one of the pre‐defined
PIN numbers, or select Other to
create a PIN.
2. Select the new device.
3. The active device is
disconnected from the system
and the new device is
connected.
To create a PIN:
Connecting to a Device
1. Select the length of the PIN
number.
Once a device is paired to the
infotainment system, it can be
connected to the infotainment
system.
Removing a Device
2. Enter the character sequence.
1. Select Remove Device from the
Bluetooth Music Setup menu.
Messages
To connect a paired device when no
other device is connected to the
infotainment system:
The following messages may
appear on the infotainment screen.
2. Select the device.
3. The device is removed from the
system.
Poor Bluetooth Signal Quality:
This message displays when the
Bluetooth signal strength is low.
1. Select the Select Device option
from the Bluetooth Music
Setup menu.
Before connecting to the removed
device again, it will need to paired
to the infotainment system.
This Feature is Unavailable While
Vehicle is Moving: This message
displays when an action is not
2. Select the new device.
allowed while the vehicle is moving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-34
Infotainment System
Controlling a Bluetooth®
Device
3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack
Auxiliary Devices (Radio
with CD/DVD and MEM)
The optional AUX input allows
portable devices to be connected
using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack
or the USB port.
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the 3.5 mm auxiliary input jack to
use a portable audio player.
Bluetooth devices that support
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote
Control Profile) version 1.0 may
be able to be controlled by the
infotainment system.
Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary
input jack can only be controlled
using the controls on the device.
Portable devices are controlled by
using the menu system described in
Operation on page 6‑7.
Press and release
g SEEK / l SEEK to
skip tracks.
Adjusting the Volume
Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
volume of the infotainment system
after the volume level has been set
on the portable audio device.
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
USB Port
The following devices may be
connected to the USB port and
controlled by the infotainment
system.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑19 for FCC information.
.
iPods
.
USB Mass Storage Devices
The AUX input is located in the
center console.
Not all iPods or USB Mass Storage
Devices are compatible with the
infotainment system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-35
Searching For a Track
Connecting and Controlling
an iPod™
Connecting and Controlling a
USB Drive
Tracks can be searched for by:
Not all iPod's can be controlled by
the infotainment system.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Files that are not stored in
folders are displayed in the root
directory (USB).
Playlists
Artists
Connecting an iPod
Albums
Connecting a USB Drive
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
Song Titles
Genres
Connect the USB drive to the
USB port.
Selecting a Track
Using the control buttons:
Composers
Audiobooks
Disconnecting a USB Drive
.
Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
select the previous or next track.
A USB drive should be ejected from
the USB port before disconnecting
it. To eject a USB drive:
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
.
Turn the TUNE knob to select a
track in the current sub menu.
The track will start to play.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select USB Eject.
To search for tracks:
Playing Tracks in Random Order
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
set Shuffle Songs to On or Off.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob and
then set Shuffle Songs to On.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Song Titles, Genres,
Composers, or Audiobooks.
Shuffle On: Plays current tracks in
random order.
Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the MENU/SELECT
knob is continuously turned
while searching in a list.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-36
Infotainment System
Selecting a Track
Tracks can be searched by:
Rear Seat
Infotainment
.
Using the control buttons:
Playlists
.
.
Artists
Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
select the previous or next track.
.
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System
Albums
.
.
Turn the TUNE knob to select a
Song Titles
track in the current sub menu.
The track will start to play.
.
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
The RSE system works with the
vehicle's infotainment system. The
DVD player is part of the front radio.
The RSE system includes a radio
with a DVD player, two rear seat
video display screens, audio/video
jacks, two wireless headphones,
and a remote control. See CD/DVD
Player on page 6‑21 or the
Genres
The number of objects in each
category is shown in parentheses
after the category.
Selecting a track in a different
folder:
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Folder List.
3. Select the folder.
To search for tracks:
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob.
2. Select Search.
4. Select the track.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, or Genres.
Searching for Tracks
separate navigation system manual
for more information on the vehicle's
DVD system.
It is normal for the search feature to
take some time to display the
information after reading the device
due to the amount of information
stored.
4. Select the track. The search rate
increases if the MENU/SELECT
knob is continuously turned
while searching in a list.
Before Driving
The RSE is for rear seat
passengers only. The driver cannot
safely view the video screen while
driving.
Recording Tracks to MEM
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display as
Unknown.
See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
page 6‑25 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-37
In severe or extreme weather
conditions the RSE system may not
work until the temperature is within
the operating range. The operating
range is above −20°C (−4°F)
and below 60°C (140°F). If the
temperature is outside of this range,
heat or cool the vehicle until it is
within the operating range.
A padlock icon may display on
the infotainment screen when the
Global Off feature is on. On some
infotainment systems, the Global
Off feature can be turned off by
performing one of the following:
Headphones
RSE includes two 2-channel
wireless headphones. Channel 1
is dedicated to the DVD player,
and Channel 2 is dedicated to
RSA selections. The headphones
are used to listen to various
multi‐media. If the vehicle is
not equipped with RSA, then
channel 2 is dedicated to any
external auxiliary device connected
to the rear A/V jacks. The wireless
headphones have an On/Off button,
channel 1/2 switch, and a volume
control. Turn the headphones off
when not in use.
.
Press and hold the radio
power button for more than
three seconds.
.
Global Off
Insert or eject any disc.
.
Depending on the infotainment
system, the RSE system may have
a Global Off feature. The Global
Off feature disables all RSE system
features. Press and hold the
radio power button for more than
three seconds for Global Off to
disable the RSE features.
Insert a DVD video disc.
.
Press the Remote Control power
button.
.
Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button
or the k button when a DVD
video disc is in the player.
Push the On/Off button to turn on
the headphones. A light on the
headphones comes on. If the light
does not come on, check the
batteries. Intermittent sound or static
can also indicate weak batteries.
See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section for more information.
.
Press the SRC button on the
steering wheel when a DVD
video disc is in the player.
.
Cycle the ignition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-38
Infotainment System
Infrared transmitters are on the
top of the left seatback video
Notice: Do not store the
Remove the batteries if the
headphones are not going to be
used for a long period of time.
headphones in heat or direct
sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not
be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can
weaken the batteries. Keep the
headphones stored in a cool, dry
place.
screen. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery
power if the RSE system and RSA
are shut off or if the headphones are
out of range of the transmitters for
more than three minutes. Moving too
far forward or stepping out of the
vehicle, can cause the headphones
to lose the signal or have static.
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
The A/V jacks may be located on
the rear of the floor console. They
allow audio or video cables to be
connected from an auxiliary device
such as a camcorder or a video
game system.
If the foam ear pads become worn
or damaged, they can be replaced
separately from the headphones.
See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
The headphones may automatically
turn off after four hours of
continuous use.
The A/V jacks are color coded:
.
Yellow for video input.
.
White for left audio input.
To adjust the volume on the
headphones, use the volume
control.
Battery Replacement
.
Red for right audio input.
To change the batteries:
Power for auxiliary devices is not
supplied by the radio system.
1. Loosen the screw to the battery
door located on the left side of
the headphones.
For best audio performance, the
headphones must be worn correctly,
with the headband over the top of
the head. L (Left) and R (Right)
are above the ear pads and
are indicators as to how the
headphones should be placed on
the head.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the
RSE system:
2. Slide the battery door open.
1. Connect the auxiliary device
cables to the A/V jacks.
3. Replace the two AAA batteries.
4. Replace the battery door and
tighten the screw.
2. Power on both the auxiliary
device and the RSE video
screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-39
Changing the Source on the Video
Display Screens
How to Change the RSE Video
Screen Settings
The RSE system transmits the
audio signal to the wireless
headphones if an audio signal is
available. See “Headphones” earlier
in this section for more information.
The image from the auxiliary device
can be switched between the video
display screens.
The screen display mode,
brightness, and language can
be changed from the setup menu
using the remote control. To change
a setting:
Audio can be heard from the wired
headphone jacks on the RSA
system by selecting the desired
source from the RSA system, if the
vehicle has this feature.
To change the display:
1. Press the AUX button on the
remote control to change the
source of both video screens
from the DVD player to the
auxiliary device.
1. Press z .
2. Use n , q , p , o and
r select the settings.
The front seat passengers are able
to listen to playback from the A/V
jacks through the vehicle speakers
by selecting Rear A/V as the source
on the radio.
3. Press z again to exit the
2. Press the AUX button a
second time to change the
left video screen source to the
DVD player and the right video
screen to the auxiliary device.
setup menu.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or
auxiliary inputs can be heard
through the following:
3. Press the AUX button a
third time to change the left
video screen source to the
auxiliary device and the right
video screen to the DVD player.
.
Wireless Headphones
.
Vehicle Speakers
.
Vehicle wired headphone jacks
4. Press the AUX button a
fourth time to change the
source of both video screens
to the DVD player.
on the rear seat audio system,
if the vehicle has this feature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-40
Infotainment System
Push the video screen down into its
locked position when it is not in use.
The screen turns off automatically.
Video Screens
Video Screen Input Jack
The video screens are located in
the back of the driver and front
passenger seats.
Each video screen is equipped
with a video input jack to allow
video cables to be connected
from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game system.
This signal will override any video
provided by the RSE system; either
the DVD or Auxiliary A/V jack
source. The RSE system must be
on for this input to operate.
Only the left RSE seatback console
contains the infrared transmitters for
the wireless headphones, they may
be visible as eight illuminated LEDs.
These LEDs are not on the right
video screen. Both seatback
consoles contain an infrared
receiver for the remote control.
They are located at the top of each
console.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at
the transmitter window at either
seatback console and press the
button. Direct sunlight or very bright
light could affect the ability of the
RSE transmitter to receive signals
from the remote control. Check
the batteries if the remote control
does not seem to be working. See
“Battery Replacement” later in this
section. Objects blocking the line of
sight could also affect the function
of the remote control.
Notice: Avoid directly touching
the video screen, as damage may
occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for
more information.
To use the video screen:
1. Push the release button located
on the seatback console.
2. Move the screen to the desired
viewing position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-41
If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in the
Radio DVD slot, the remote control
O button can be used to turn on the
video screen display and start the
disc. The infotainment system can
also turn on the video screen
display. See CD/DVD Player on
page 6‑21 or the separate
Remote Control Buttons
r (Enter): Press to select the
highlighted choice in any menu.
O (Power): Press to turn the
video screens on and off.
z (Display Menu): Press to adjust
the brightness, screen display
mode, and display the
P (Illumination): Press to turn the
remote control backlight on. The
backlight times out after several
seconds if no other button is
pressed.
language menu.
q (Return): Press to exit the
current active menu and return to
the previous menu. This button
operates only when the display
menu or a DVD menu is active.
navigation system manual for more
information.
v (Title): Press to return to the
main menu of the DVD. This
function could vary for each disc.
Notice: Storing the remote
control in a hot area or in direct
sunlight can damage it, and the
repairs will not be covered by the
warranty. Storage in extreme cold
can weaken the batteries. Keep
the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
c (Stop): Press to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a
DVD. Press twice to return to the
beginning of the DVD.
y (Main Menu): Press to access
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is
different on every DVD. Use the
navigation arrows to move the
cursor. After making a selection
press the enter button. This button
only operates when using a DVD.
s (Play/Pause): Press to start
playing a DVD. Press to pause a
DVD while it is playing. Press again
to continue playing.
n , q, p, o (Menu Navigation
Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to
navigate through a menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-42
Infotainment System
Depending on the infotainment
system in the vehicle, DVD
playback may be slowed down by
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch
the video displays between the DVD
player and an auxiliary source.
r (Fast Reverse): Press to
quickly reverse the DVD or CD.
To stop fast reversing a DVD video,
pressing s then [. Reverse
slow play by pressing s then r.
Press s again to cancel slow play.
d (Camera): Press to change
the camera angle on DVDs that
have this feature when the DVD is
playing.
press s. To stop fast reversing a
DVD audio or CD, release r. This
button might not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press to go to the start of the
current track or chapter. Press
again to go to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work
when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the
previews.
\ (Clear) (If Available): Press this
button within three seconds after
inputting a numeric selection, to
clear all numeric inputs.
[ (Fast Forward): Press to fast
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast
forwarding a DVD video, press s.
To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
} 10 (Double Digit Entries)
(If Available): Press this button to
select chapter or track numbers
greater than 9. Press this button
before inputting the number.
or CD, release [. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press
to go to the beginning of the next
chapter or track. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
The numbered keypad provides the
capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
e (Audio): Press to change audio
tracks on DVDs that have this
feature when the DVD is playing.
{ (Subtitles): Press to turn
ON/OFF subtitles and to move
through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-43
Replacing the Remote Control
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
If the remote control becomes lost
or damaged, a new universal
remote control can be purchased.
Use a Toshiba® code set for
replacement universal remote
controls.
Problem
Recommended Action
No power.
The ignition might not be turned
ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the screen. Check the display mode settings in
There are black borders on the top
and bottom or on both sides or it
looks stretched out.
the setup menu by pressing the
display menu button on the remote
control.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control
batteries:
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input
or scrolls.
connections at both devices.
1. Slide back the rear cover on the
remote control.
The remote control does not work.
Check to make sure there is no
obstruction between the remote
control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure
they are not dead or installed
incorrectly.
2. Replace the two batteries in the
compartment.
3. Replace the battery cover.
Remove the batteries from the
remote control if unused for an
extended period of time.
After stopping the player, I push
Play but sometimes the DVD starts one time, the DVD player resumes
where I left off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD was
If the stop button was pressed
beginning.
stopped. If the stop button was
pressed two times the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of
the DVD.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-44
Infotainment System
DVD Display Error Messages
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)
The DVD display error message
depends on which radio the vehicle
has. The video screen may display
one of the following:
Problem
Recommended Action
The auxiliary source is running but
there is no picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video screen
is in the auxiliary source mode by
pressing the AUX button on the
remote control.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both devices.
Disc Load/Eject Error or
Mechanical Error: There are disc
load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error or Unknown
Format: The disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions, low
audio cuts out or buzzes.
batteries, reception range,
and interference from cellular
telephone towers or by using a
cellular telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones are
on correctly using the L (left) and
R (right) on the headphones.
Check that the headphones are
positioned properly with the
headband across the top of
the head.
Disc Region Error or Disc Error:
The disc is not from a correct
region.
No Disc Inserted: No disc is
present when the Z EJECT or
MEM/DVD/AUX button is pressed
on the radio.
I lost the remote and/or the
headphones.
See your dealer/retailer for
assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no Check that the RSE video screen
picture or sound.
is sourced to the DVD player by
pressing the AUX button on the
remote control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-45
Audio can be heard through
DVD Distortion
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System
wired headphones (not included)
plugged into the jacks on the RSA.
If the vehicle has a Rear Seat
Entertainment system with wireless
headphones, audio can also be
heard on Channel 2 of the wireless
headphones.
Video distortion can occur when
operating cellular phones, scanners,
CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,
or walkie talkies.
Vehicles with this feature allow
the rear seat passengers to listen
to and control any of the music
sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other
auxiliary sources. RSA can only
control music sources that the front
seat passengers are listening to,
except on radios where dual control
is allowed.
It might be necessary to turn off the
DVD player when operating one of
these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
To listen to a portable audio device
through the RSA, attach the
portable audio device to the
auxiliary input, if available. Turn the
device on, then choose the front
auxiliary input with the RSA SRCE
button.
Cleaning the RSE Seatback
Console
RSA can function when the front
radio is off. X displays on the
infotainment system when RSA
is on.
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water to clean the RSE
seatback console surface.
Cleaning the Video Screens
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water. Use care when
touching or cleaning the screens as
damage could result.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-46
Infotainment System
passengers are listening to the
radio, this function may be inactive
on some radios.
While listening to a disc, press ¨
to go to the next track or chapter on
the disc. Press © to go back to the
start of the current track or chapter if
more than ten seconds have played.
If the front seat passengers are
listening to a disc, this function may
be inactive on some radios. Press
and hold © or ¨ to fast reverse or
P (Power): Press to turn the RSA
© ¨ (Seek): While listening
to the radio, press to go to the
previous or to the next station
and stay there. If the front seat
passengers are listening to the
radio, this function may be inactive
on some radios.
fast forward.
on or off.
When a DVD video menu is being
Volume: Turn to increase or
decrease the volume of the wired
headphones. The left knob controls
the left headphones and the right
knob controls the right. Use the
volume control on headphones for
wireless headphones.
displayed, press © or ¨ to
cursor up or down on the menu.
Hold © or ¨ to cursor left or right
on the menu.
Press and hold © or ¨ until
“Tune” displays. Continue to
PROG (Program): Press to go to
the next preset radio station or
channel set on the main radio. If the
front seat passengers are listening
to the radio, this function may be
inactive on some radios.
SRCE (Source): Press to select
between the radio, CD, and if these
features are available: DVD, front
or rear auxiliary, HDD, USB. The
front radio may override the rear
selection as required.
press © or ¨ to tune to an
individual station. Tune stays active
until © or ¨ has not been pressed
for several seconds. If the front seat
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
Bluetooth Controls
6-47
When a CD or DVD audio disc is
playing, press PROG to go to the
beginning of the disc or display disc
info. If the front seat passengers are
listening to a disc, this function may
be inactive on some radios.
Phone
Use the buttons located on the
infotainment system and the
steering wheel to operate the
Bluetooth system.
Bluetooth (Overview)
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
can use a Bluetooth capable cell
phone with a Hands Free Profile
to make and receive phone calls.
The infotainment system and
voice recognition are used to
control the system. The system
can be used while in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of
the Bluetooth system can be up to
9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones support
all functions and not all phones work
with the Bluetooth system. See
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
information about compatible
phones.
Steering Wheel Controls
When a disc is playing in the CD
or DVD changer, press and hold
PROG to select the next disc,
if multiple discs are loaded. If the
front seat passengers are listening
to a disc, this function may be
inactive on some radios.
b / g (Push To Talk) : Press to
answer incoming calls, to confirm
system information, and to start
voice recognition.
c / $ (End Call / Mute): Press to
end a call, reject a call, or to cancel
an operation.
The PROG button may be used
to access the menu of an MP3.
Infotainment System Controls
Once in the menu, use © or ¨ to
make selections.
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the
infotainment controls, see Operation
When a DVD video menu is
displayed, press PROG, or press
and hold PROG to perform the
menu function, ENTER.
on page 6‑7
.
PHONE: Press to enter the Phone
main menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-48
Infotainment System
If a Bluetooth phone is not
Voice Recognition
Other Information
connected, calls will be made
using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
Owner's Guide for more information.
The voice recognition system uses
commands to control the system
and dial phone numbers.
The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
Noise: The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
A Bluetooth phone with MP3
capability can not be connected to
the vehicle as a phone and an MP3
player at the same time.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑19 for FCC information.
When to Speak: A tone sounds to
indicate that the system is ready for
a voice command. Wait for the tone
and then speak.
The pairing process can be started
by using the voice recognition
system or the controls on the
infotainment system.
Bluetooth
(Infotainment Controls)
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the
infotainment controls, see Operation
Pairing Information:
Audio System
.
Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
When using the Bluetooth system,
sound comes through the vehicle's
front audio system speakers and
overrides the audio system. Use
on page 6‑7
.
.
.
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone
must be paired to the Bluetooth
system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used.
See the cell phone manufacturer
user guide for Bluetooth functions
before pairing the cell phone.
The Bluetooth system links with
the first available paired cell
phone based on the order
shown in the device list.
the VOL/ O knob during a call to
change the volume level. The
adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. The system
maintains a minimum volume level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-49
.
.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
provide the vehicle's GPS
location through the Bluetooth
Serial Port is not available.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
Pairing should only need to be
completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is
deleted.
5. Start the Pairing process on the
cell phone that will be paired to
the vehicle. Reference the cell
phone manufacturers user guide
for information on this process.
4. Select Device List.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
To link to a different paired phone,
see “Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.
Locate the device named
“General Motors” in the list on
the cellular phone and follow the
instructions on the cell phone to
enter the four digit PIN number
provided by the system.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select Device List.
6. The system prompts for a name
for the phone and confirms the
name provided. This name is
used to indicate which phone is
connected.
5. Select the phone to delete and
follow the on screen prompts.
4. Select Pair Device (Phone).
A four digit PIN number appears
on the display.
7. The system responds with
“<Phone name> has been
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete.
If the "Add new GPS device"
option is selected, the system
will start a search for Bluetooth
"Handsfree" profile devices just
like if "Add new Phone" was
selected. The additional GPS
location feature which would
8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to pair
additional phones.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-50
Infotainment System
Linking to a Different Phone
Making a Call
Accepting or Declining a Call
In order to link to a different
When an incoming call is received,
the infotainment system mutes and
a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Radio with CD
phone, the new phone must be in
the vehicle and available to be
connected to the bluetooth system
before the process is started.
1. Press the PHONE button twice.
2. Enter the character sequence.
See “Entering a Character
Accepting a Call
Sequence” in Operation on
page 6‑7 for more information.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
to “Answer” and press the
MENU/SELECT knob to accept
the call.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
3. Select Call to start dialing the
number.
Declining a Call
4. Select Device List.
Radio with CD/DVD/MEM
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select Enter number.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
to “Decline” and press the
MENU/SELECT knob to decline
the call.
5. Select the new phone to link
to and follow the on screen
prompts.
3. Enter the character sequence.
See “Entering a Character
If delete is selected, the
highlighted phone will be
deleted.
Call Waiting
Sequence” in Operation on
page 6‑7 for more information.
Call waiting must be supported on
the bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
4. Select Call to start dialing the
number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-51
Accepting a Call
To start a conference while in a
current call:
Muting a Call
To Mute a Call
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
to “Answer” and press the
MENU/SELECT knob to accept
the call.
1. Turn or press the
MENU/SELECT knob.
Turn or press the MENU/SELECT
knob and select Mute Call.
2. Select Enter Number.
To Cancel Mute
Declining a Call
3. Enter the character sequence
then select call. See “Entering a
Character Sequence” in
Turn or press the MENU/SELECT
knob and select Mute Call.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
to “Decline” and press the
MENU/SELECT knob to decline
the call.
Operation on page 6‑7 for
more information.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
4. After the call has been
placed, turn or press the
MENU/SELECT knob and
choose Merge Calls.
Switching Between Calls
(Call Waiting Calls Only)
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven
phone system.
To switch between calls:
1. Turn or press the
MENU/SELECT knob.
5. To add more callers to the
conference call, repeat steps 1
through 4. The amount of callers
that can be added are limited by
your wireless service carrier.
1. Turn or press the
MENU/SELECT knob and
select Enter Number.
2. Select Switch Call from
the menu.
2. Enter the character sequence,
see “Entering a Character
Conference Calling
Ending a Call
Sequence” in Operation on
page 6‑7 for more information.
Conference calling and three way
calling must be supported on the
bluetooth phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier to work.
Turn or press the MENU/SELECT
knob and select Hang Up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-52
Infotainment System
Pairing Information:
Pairing a Phone
Bluetooth
(Voice Recognition)
.
Up to five cell phones can be
1. Press b / g.
paired to the Bluetooth system.
.
For vehicles without a
Pairing
.
The pairing process is disabled
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”
followed by a tone.
A Bluetooth cell phone must be
paired to the Bluetooth system
when the vehicle is moving.
.
The Bluetooth system links with
and then connected to the vehicle
before it can be used. See the cell
phone manufacturers user guide for
Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made
using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
Owner's Guide for more information.
the first available paired cell
phone based on the order
shown in the device list.
.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
.
Pairing only needs to be
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
completed once, unless the
pairing information changes or
the phone is deleted.
The pairing process can be started
by using the voice recognition
system or the controls on the
infotainment system.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds
with instructions and a four‐digit
PIN number. The PIN number
will be used in Step 4.
To link to a different paired phone,
see Linking to a Different Phone
later in this section.
A Bluetooth phone with MP3
capability can not be paired to the
vehicle as a phone and an MP3
player at the same time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-53
4. Start the Pairing process on the
cell phone that will be paired to
the vehicle. Reference the cell
phone manufacturers user guide
for information on this process.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press b / g.
1. Press b / g.
.
For vehicles without a
.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”
followed by a tone.
system responds “Ready”
followed by a tone.
Locate the device named
“General Motors” in the list on
the cell phone and follow the
instructions on the cell phone to
enter the four‐digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
.
For vehicles with a
.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
5. The system prompts for a name
for the phone. This name will be
used to indicate which phone is
connected. The system confirms
the name.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
6. The system responds with
“<Phone name> has been
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks
which phone to delete followed
by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all
the paired Bluetooth devices.
The system will respond “is
connected” if a phone is
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for
additional phones to be paired.
connected to the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-54
Infotainment System
4. Say the name of the phone to
be deleted. If the phone name
is unknown, use the “List”
command for a list of all paired
phones. The system responds
“Would you like to delete
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone
number to be stored without
entering the digits individually.
3. Say “Change phone”. The
system responds “Please wait
while I search for other phones”.
1. Press b / g.
<phone name>? Yes or No”
followed by a tone.
.
For vehicles without a
.
If another phone is found,
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”
followed by a tone.
the response will be
“<Phone name> is now
connected”.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.
The system responds “OK,
deleting <phone name>”.
.
For vehicles with a
.
If another phone is not
Linking to a Different Phone
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
found, the original phone
remains connected.
1. Press b / g.
.
Storing Name Tags
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”
followed by a tone.
The system can store up to thirty
phone numbers as name tags that
are shared between the Bluetooth
and OnStar systems.
2. Say “Store”. The system
responds “Store, number please”
followed by a tone.
.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
The system uses the following
commands to store and retrieve
phone numbers:
.
Store
.
Digit Store
.
Directory
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-55
.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
3. Say the complete phone number
to be stored at once with no
pauses.
5. Say a name tag for the phone
number. The name tag is
recorded and the system
responds “About to store
<name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
.
If the system recognizes
the number the response is
“OK, Storing”.
.
If the name tag does not
.
If the system does not
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system
responds with “Please say the
first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
sound correct, say “No” and
repeat Step 5.
recognize the phone
number, the response is
“Store <Phone number>”.
“Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct, say
“Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The
system will ask for the
number again.
.
If the name tag sounds
correct, say “Yes” and the
name tag is stored. After
the number is stored the
system returns to the
main menu.
3. Say the first digit to be stored.
The system will repeat back the
digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the
number to be stored is complete.
Using the Digit Store Command
.
If an unwanted number is
4. After the system stores the
phone number, it responds
“Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.
The digit store command allows a
phone number to be stored by
entering the digits individually.
recognized by the system,
say “Clear” at any time to
clear the last number.
.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system,
say “Verify” at any time.
1. Press b / g.
.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”
followed by a tone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-56
Infotainment System
4. After the complete number has
been entered, say “Store”. The
system responds “Please say
the name tag” followed by
a tone.
Using the Directory Command
Deleting Name Tags
The directory command lists all of
the name tags stored by the system.
To use the directory command:
The system uses the following
commands to delete name tags:
.
Delete
1. Press b / g.
.
Delete all name tags
5. Say a name tag for the phone
number. The name tag is
recorded and the system
responds “About to store
<name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
.
For vehicles without a
Using the Delete Command
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”
followed by a tone.
The delete command is used to
delete specific name tags.
.
To delete name tags:
For vehicles with a
.
If the name tag does not
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
1. Press b / g.
sound correct, say “No” and
repeat Step 5.
.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”
followed by a tone.
.
If the name tag sounds
correct, say “Yes” and the
name tag is stored. After
the number is stored the
system returns to the
main menu.
.
For vehicles with a
2. Say “Directory”. The system
responds “Directory” and lists all
stored name tags. The system
returns to the main menu when
the list is complete.
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-57
2. Say “Delete”. The system
responds “Delete, please say
the name tag” followed by
a tone.
Using the Delete All Name Tags
Command
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The
system responds “You are about
to delete all name tags stored in
your phone directory and your
route destination directory. Are
you sure you want to do this?
Please say yes or no.”
The delete all name tags command
deletes all stored phone book name
tags and route name tags for
OnStar if stored.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted.
The system responds “Would
you like to delete, <name tag>?
Please say yes or no”.
To delete all name tags:
.
Say “Yes” to delete all
name tags.
1. Press b / g.
.
If the name tag is correct,
.
.
say “Yes” to delete the
name tag. The system
responds with “OK, deleting
<name tag>, returning to
the main menu.”
Say “No” to cancel the
function and return to the
main menu.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”
followed by a tone.
Making a Call
.
For vehicles with a
Calls can be made using the
following commands:
.
If the name tag is incorrect,
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let's
try again, please say the
name tag.”
.
Dial
.
Digit Dial
.
Call
.
Re‐dial
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-58
Infotainment System
Using the Dial Command
3. Say the entire number without
pausing.
Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press b / g.
1. Press b / g.
.
If the system recognizes
.
.
For vehicles without a
For vehicles without a
the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials
the number.
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”
followed by a tone.
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”
followed by a tone.
.
If the system does not
.
.
For vehicles with a
For vehicles with a
recognize the number, it
confirms the numbers
followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
“OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is
not correct, say “No”. The
system will ask for the
number again.
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
“Dial using <phone name>.
“Number please” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system
responds “Digit dial using
<phone name>, please say the
first digit to dial” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the digits to be dialed one at
a time. The system repeats back
the digit it heard followed by
a tone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-59
4. Continue entering digits until the
number to be dialed is complete.
After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The
system responds “OK, Dialing”
and dials the number.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds
“Call using <phone name>.
Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.
Using the Re‐dial Command
1. Press b / g.
.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”
followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag of the person
to call.
.
If an unwanted number is
.
If the system recognizes
.
recognized by the system,
say “Clear” at any time to
clear the last number.
For vehicles with a
the name tag it responds
“OK, calling, <name tag>”
and dials the number.
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
.
To hear all of the numbers
.
If the system does not
recognized by the system,
say “Verify” at any time.
recognize the name tag, it
confirms the name tag
followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
with “OK, calling, <name
tag>” and dials the number.
If the name tag is not
Using the Call Command
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The
system responds “Re‐dial using
<phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the
1. Press b / g.
.
For vehicles without a
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”
followed by a tone.
connected Bluetooth phone.
correct, say “No”. The
system will ask for the
name tag again.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-60
Infotainment System
Receiving a Call
Three‐Way Calling
Muting a Call
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring
tone is heard in the vehicle.
Three‐Way Calling must be
supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
.
Press b g to answer the call.
To Mute a call
1. While on a call press b g. The
system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
.
Press c / $ to ignore a call.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
Call Waiting
2. Say “Three‐way call”.
The system responds with
“Three‐way call, please say
dial or call”.
Call waiting must be supported on
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system
responds “Call muted”.
.
Press b g to answer an
incoming call when another call
is active. The original call is
placed on hold.
To Cancel Mute
3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
to be called.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
4. Once the call is connected,
.
Press b g again to return to the
original call.
press b g to link all the callers
together.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.
The system responds
.
To ignore the incoming call, no
“Resuming call”.
Ending a Call
action is required.
Press c / $ to end a call.
.
Press c / $ to disconnect the
current call and switch to the call
on hold.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-61
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
To access contacts stored in the cell
phone:
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system and
the cell phone.
The cell phone must be paired
and connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection
process can take up to two minutes
after the key is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY.
1. Press b / g.
.
For vehicles without a
To Transfer Audio to the Cell
Phone
navigation system, the
system responds “Ready”
followed by a tone.
During a call with the audio in the
vehicle:
.
For vehicles with a
navigation system, the
system responds with a
tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The system
responds “Ready” followed
by a tone.
Press b g during a call with the
audio on the cell phone. If the audio
does not transfer to the vehicle,
use the audio transfer feature on
the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufactures guide for more
information.
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system
responds “Transferring call” and
the audio transfers to the cell
phone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”
followed by a tone.
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice Pass‐Thru allows access to
the voice recognition commands on
the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
3. Say “Voice”. The system
responds “OK, accessing
<phone name>”.
.
The cell phone's normal
prompt messages will go
through its cycle according
to the phone's operating
instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-62
Infotainment System
.
.
If the system does not
recognize the number it
responds “Dial Number,
please say yes or no?”
followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
“OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and
the call continues.
If the system does not
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
recognize the name tag it
responds “Dial <name tag>,
please say yes or no?”
followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
with “OK, Sending <name
tag>” and the dial tones are
sent and the call continues.
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers and the numbers
stored as name tags during a call.
Use this feature when calling a
menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can also be stored for use.
Sending a Number During a Call
Sending a Stored Name Tag
During a Call
Clearing the System
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
Unless information is deleted out of
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the
phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
previous sections on Deleting a
Paired Phone and Deleting
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
“Say a number to send tones”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The
system responds “Say a name
tag to send tones” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
.
If the system recognizes
the number it responds
“OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and
the call continues.
Name Tags.
3. Say the name tag to send.
.
If the system recognizes
the number it responds
“OK, Sending <name tag>”
and the dial tones are sent
and the call continues.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-63
The pairing process can be started
by using the voice recognition
system or the controls on the
infotainment system.
Pairing a Phone
Bluetooth (Navigation)
1. Press the CONFIG hard key
repeatedly until the Phone menu
is shown or touch the Phone tab
on the screen.
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using
the infotainment controls, see
“Overview” under Introduction, in
the Navigation supplement.
Pairing Information:
.
Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
Bluetooth Pairing
.
The pairing process is disabled
To make calls with a Bluetooth
cell phone through your vehicle,
it must be paired to the vehicle's
Bluetooth system first and then
connected to the vehicle before
it can be used. Refer to the cell
phone manufacturer's user guide
for Bluetooth pairing instructions.
If a Bluetooth phone is off or not
connected, calls will automatically
be made using the OnStar®
when the vehicle is moving.
.
The Bluetooth system links with
the first available paired cell
phone based on the order
shown in the device list.
.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the vehicle's
Bluetooth system at a time.
.
Pairing should only need to be
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is
deleted.
Hands‐Free Calling feature,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information
about OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
To link to a different paired phone,
see “Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.
A Bluetooth phone with MP3
capability cannot be connected to
the vehicle as a phone and an MP3
player at the same time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-64
Infotainment System
The additional GPS location
feature provides the vehicle's
GPS location through the
Bluetooth Serial Port Profile
is not available.
Follow the instructions given on
the cell phone or follow the voice
prompts, to enter the four digit
PIN number that has been
provided.
4. The system voice prompt
requests that you say the name
you want used for the phone
that is being paired. Use a name
that best describes the phone.
The system voice prompt then
repeats the name you provided
for confirmation, say “Yes”.
3. Select “Add New Phone”, the
pairing process will begin
searching for Bluetooth devices
on your cellular phone. See the
cell phone manufacturer's user
guide for information on this
process.
5. The system responds with
“phone name has been
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete.
On the cell phone, locate the
device name, such as “General
Motors”. If in another country,
the device's name may have a
GM acronym for that counry.
If the “Add new GPS device”
option is selected, the
system will start a search for
Bluetooth “Handsfree” profile
devices just like if you had
selected “Add new Phone”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-65
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
1. Press the CONFIG hard key
repeatedly until the Phone menu
is shown or touch the Phone tab
displayed on the screen.
3. Select the Device List submenu.
A list of all previously paired phones
will be displayed. If there is a
currently connected phone, a check
mark will appear on the right side of
the Phone name.
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-66
Infotainment System
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press the CONFIG hard key
repeatedly until the Phone menu
is shown or touch the Phone tab
on the screen.
3. Select the Device List submenu.
4. Select the phone to be deleted
and then follow the on screen
prompts to delete the device
from the system.
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-67
Linking to a Different Phone
In order to link to a different phone,
the new phone must be in the
vehicle and available to be
connected to the bluetooth system
before the process is started.
1. Press the CONFIG hard key
repeatedly until the Phone menu
is shown or touch the Phone tab
on the screen.
5. Once a phone has been deleted,
the only way to connect back to
that phone is to pair the phone
again. See “Bluetooth Pairing”
earlier before the process is
started.
3. Select the Device List submenu.
2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-68
Infotainment System
Making a Call
Press 5 located on the faceplate of
the infotainment system, to access
the phone menu.
4. Select the phone to be linked
and then follow the on screen
prompts.
5. The Phone menu will be
displayed with the name of the
phone linked.
Enter Number
Use this option to enter a phone
number and make a call. To do this:
1. Press the Enter Number
selection. A dial pad displays on
the Navigation screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
Call Waiting
6-69
Accepting a Call
Call waiting must be supported on
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
Press b g on the steering wheel
control to answer the incoming call
or touch the Answer option to
answer the call.
Switching Calls (Only Available
with Call Waiting)
This feature allows you to switch
between calls, making one call
active and placing the other on hold.
2. Enter the desired number by
touching the appropriate buttons
on the screen or using the
rotary knob.
3. Press the CALL button to make
the call.
Declining a Call
Accepting or Declining an
Incoming Call
Press c / $ on the steering wheel
controls or select the Decline option
to decline the call.
When an incoming call is received,
the infotainment system mutes any
audio being played and sounds a
ring tone.
Switch Call: Turn or press the
menu select knob to “Switch Call”
and press Enter or touch the
“Switch Call” option.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-70
Infotainment System
Conference Calling
Ending a Call
Conference and three-way calling
must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless
service carrier to work.
To start a conference while in a
current call:
1. Press 5 on the faceplate until
the Phone main screen is shown
with the current active call.
3. Make another call. The first call
will be placed on hold while the
second call is dialing and
connected.
1. Press the 5 hard key.
2. Select Hang Up.
4. To make a conference call,
select the “Merge Calls” option
which will merge both calls into
one conference call.
Mute or UnMute a Call
1. Press the 5 hard key.
2. Select the Mute call option to
mute the call.
5. To add more callers to the
conference call, repeat Steps 2
through 4. The amount of callers
that can be added are limited by
your wireless service carrier.
3. Select the Mute call option again
to unmute the call.
2. Select the “Enter Number”
option.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
6-71
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers during a call, this is
used when calling a menu driven
phone system.
2. Select “Enter Number” option
and enter the number sequence.
The DTMF Tones will be generated
on the network as you enter each
number
1. Press the 5 hard key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-72
Infotainment System
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
7-1
Climate Control Systems
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Rear Climate Control
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
this system.
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
A. Fan Control
B. Power
F. Air Delivery Mode Control
G. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Control
C. AUTO
H. Driver and Passenger Heated
and Ventilated Seats
D. ZONE
E. Defrost
I. Air Conditioning
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2
Climate Controls
J. Recirculation
English units can be changed to
metric units through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
Vehicle Personalization on
goes into manual mode. Press
AUTO to return to automatic
operation.
K. Outside Air
L. Rear Window Defogger
H G (Air Delivery Mode Control):
Press to change the direction of the
airflow. The current mode appears
in the display screen. Changing the
mode cancels the automatic
operation and the system goes into
manual mode. Press AUTO to
return to automatic operation.
page 4‑41
.
Automatic Operation
Q / R (Driver and Passenger
Temperature Control): The
temperature can be adjusted
separately for the driver and the
passenger. Press to increase or
decrease the temperature.
The system automatically controls
the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning and recirculation in
order to heat or cool the vehicle to
the desired temperature.
When the indicator light is on, the
system is in full automatic operation.
If the air delivery mode or fan
setting is manually adjusted, the
auto indicator turns off and displays
will show the selected settings.
ZONE: Press to link all climate
zone settings to the driver settings.
The ZONE indicator light turns off.
When the passenger settings are
adjusted, the ZONE indicator light
is on.
To change the current mode, select
one of the following:
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets.
To place the system in automatic
mode do the following:
Manual Operation
O (Power): Press to turn the
1. Press AUTO.
C (Tri‐Level): Air is divided
between the windshield, instrument
panel, and floor outlets.
climate control system on or off.
2. Set the temperature. Allow the
system time to stabilize. Then
adjust the temperature as
D C (Fan Control): Press to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
Pressing either button cancels
automatic operation and the system
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets.
needed for best comfort.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
7-3
Auto Defog: The climate control
system may have a sensor to
automatically detect high humidity
inside the vehicle. When high
humidity is detected, the climate
control system may adjust to
- (Defog): Clears the windows of
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield and floor outlets.
h (Recirculation): Press to turn
on recirculation. An indicator light
comes on. Air is recirculated to
quickly cool the inside of the vehicle
or prevent outside air and odors
from entering.
8 (Upper): Air is directed to the
windshield outlets.
outside air supply and turn on the
air conditioner. If the climate control
system does not detect possible
window fogging, it returns to normal
operation. To turn Auto Defog off or
on, see Climate and Air Quality
under Vehicle Personalization on
7 (Hi-Level): Air is divided
between the windshield and
instrument panel outlets.
Automatic Air Recirculation:
When the AUTO indicator light is
on, the air is automatically
recirculated as needed to help
quickly cool the inside of the
vehicle.
0 (Defrost): Clears the
windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield.
page 4‑41
.
The climate control system may
have a sensor to detect air pollution.
In auto recirculation control, the Air
Quality Control system may operate.
To adjust the sensitivity of the
Air Quality Control, see Climate
and Air Quality under Vehicle
# (Air Conditioning): Press to
turn the automatic air conditioning
on or off. If the fan is turned off or
the outside temperature falls below
freezing, the air conditioner will
not run.
% (Outside Air): Press to turn
on outside air. An indicator light
comes on. Outside air is circulated
through the vehicle.
Personalization on page 4‑41.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation and the air conditioner
runs as needed. When the indicator
light is on, the air conditioner runs
automatically to cool the air inside
the vehicle or to dry the air needed
to defog the windshield faster.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-4
Climate Controls
The heated outside rearview mirrors
turn on when the rear window
defogger button is on and helps to
clear fog or frost from the surface of
the mirror. See Heated Mirrors on
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation: For vehicles with the
remote vehicle start feature, the
climate control system may run
when the vehicle is started remotely.
The system uses the driver's
previous settings to heat or cool the
inside of the vehicle. See Remote
Vehicle Start on page 1‑9.
Rear Window Defogger
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off.
The rear window defogger turns
off automatically after about
10 minutes. If turned on again it
runs for about 5 minutes before
turning off. At higher speeds, the
rear window defogger may stay on
continuously.
page 1‑22
.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost
or other material from the inside
of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or
anything else that is sharp. This
may damage the rear window
defogger grid and affect your
radio's ability to pick up stations
clearly. The repairs wouldn't be
covered by your warranty.
The rear window defogger turns on
if it is cold outside.
Sensors
The rear window defogger can be
set to automatic operation, see
Climate and Air Quality under
Vehicle Personalization on
The solar sensor located on top of
the instrument panel near the
windshield, monitors the solar heat.
page 4‑41. When auto rear defog is
selected, the rear window defogger
turns on automatically when the
interior temperature is cold and the
outside temperature is about 40°F
and below. The auto rear defogger
turns off automatically after about
10 minutes. At higher speeds, the
rear window defogger may stay on
continuously.
Heated and Ventilated Seats:
Press to heat or ventilate the seat.
See Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 2‑9.
The climate control system
uses the sensor information to
adjust the temperature, fan speed,
recirculation, and air delivery mode
for best comfort.
If the sensor is covered the
automatic climate control system
may not work properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
7-5
The rear climate control can
be turned off by pressing the
C button.
Rear Climate Control System
For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning controls, they are
integrated with the rear seat audio controls located in the center console.
Independent Mode: This mode
directs rear seating airflow
according to the settings of the rear
controls.
The front climate control system
must be on for the rear climate
control to work. To turn on the rear
climate control from rear seating,
press any rear climate control
button.
The rear climate control will not
work if the front climate control
system is in defrost.
Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls
A. Fan Control
ZONE: When the rear climate
control is turned on from the rear,
the ZONE indicator light will turn on.
Press the ZONE button on the front
climate control system to turn off the
rear blower and match the rear
settings to the front. The ZONE
indicator light and rear climate
control display will turn off.
B. Air Delivery Mode Control
C. Temperature Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-6
Climate Controls
Automatic Operation
Air Vents
AUTO: Press N until the AUTO
setting is selected to control the rear
temperature, air delivery, and fan
speed automatically.
Move the sliding knob on the air
outlets up and down or left and
right to direct the airflow. Use the
thumbwheels near the air outlets to
open or close off the airflow.
Manual Operation
Operation Tips
D C (Fan Control): Press these
buttons on the rear seat audio
control panel to increase or
decrease the airflow. Pressing the
fan up button when the system is off
will turn the system on. The air
delivery mode remains in its
previous setting.
.
Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from air inlets at the
base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
.
Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.
+/− (Temperature Control): Press
these buttons to adjust the
temperature of the air flowing into
the passenger area. Press the +
button for warmer air and press the
− button for cooler air.
.
Use of non‐GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the
outside of the vehicle.
N (Air Delivery Mode Control):
Press the mode button to change
the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. Multiple presses will cycle
through the delivery selections.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-1
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Starting the Gasoline
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Parking Over Things
Ride Control Systems
Driving and
Operating
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 8-35
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 8-35
Driving Information
Driving for Better Fuel
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 8-8
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 8-11
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 8-38
Rear Vision
Engine Exhaust
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Fuel
Automatic Transmission
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 8-45
California Fuel
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 8-23
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 8-46
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Filling a Portable Fuel
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 8-31
Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 8-16
Adjustable Throttle and Brake
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2
Driving and Operating
.
.
When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control, if equipped.
Towing
Driving Information
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Trailer Sway
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips
to get the best fuel economy
possible.
Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
.
.
.
Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Combine several trips into a
single trip.
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
.
.
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly.
Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.
Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
.
Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-3
Police records show that almost
40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these
deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving.
In recent years, more than
Defensive Driving
Drunk Driving
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
your safety belt, see Safety Belts on
WARNING
{
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes,
page 2‑13
.
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
WARNING
{
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do and be ready.
In addition:
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
.
Allow enough following
distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem is
for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person's system
can make crash injuries worse,
especially injuries to the brain,
spinal cord, or heart.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-4
Driving and Operating
This means that when anyone who
has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that
person's chance of being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than
if the person had not been drinking.
pavement or gravel; the condition of
the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force
applied.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light
on page 4‑23
.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding to
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is
Avoid needless heavy
braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems
reaction time.
followed by heavy braking — rather
than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. The brakes might not
have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster with a lot of heavy
braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic following
distances eliminates a lot of
Average reaction time is about
three‐fourths of a second. But that is
only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two
or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and
eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But
even in three‐fourths of a second, a
vehicle moving at 100 km/h
(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That
could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough
space between the vehicle and
others is important.
help to control the vehicle while
driving — brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of
the vehicle. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 8‑32 and
StabiliTrak System on page 8‑33.
unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer
accessories can affect vehicle
performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 9‑3.
If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the pedal could get harder to push
down. If the engine stops, there will
still be some power brake assist but
it will be used when the brake is
And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the
surface of the road, whether it is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-5
applied. Once the power assist is
used up, it can take longer to stop
and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
If there is a need to reduce speed,
do it before entering the curve, while
the front wheels are straight.
page 8‑4. It is better to remove as
much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right
Try to adjust the speed so you can
drive through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and
then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
depending on the space available.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer
accessories can affect vehicle
performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 9‑3.
Steering
Steering in Emergencies
Power Steering
There are times when steering can
be more effective than braking. For
example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there is
no room. That is the time for
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops or the
power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.
If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
positions, it can be turned a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road
surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
While in a curve, speed is the one
factor that can be controlled.
evasive action — steering around
the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in
emergencies like these. First apply
the brakes. See Braking on
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-6
Driving and Operating
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
is nothing in the way, steer so that
the vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. Turn the steering wheel
8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), about
one-eighth turn, until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions,
and by not overdriving those
conditions. But skids are always
possible.
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
The three types of skids correspond
to the vehicle's three control
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
systems. In the braking skid, the
wheels are not rolling. In the
steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
If the level of the shoulder is only
slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
off the accelerator and then, if there
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
WARNING (Continued)
8-7
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to
slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance is longer
and vehicle control more limited.
Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep‐standing or flowing water.
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
While driving on a surface with
reduced traction, try your best to
avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You might
not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when you
have any doubt.
WARNING
{
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under your vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road
is wet enough and you are going
fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.
(Continued)
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-8
Driving and Operating
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
Always be alert and pay attention
to your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle
and rest.
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
.
.
.
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in
Keep windshield wiping
Other driving tips include:
good shape.
equipment in good shape.
.
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
Check all fluid levels and brakes,
.
.
Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
.
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
Keep your eyes moving — scan
Have good tires with proper
.
Going down steep or long hills,
the road ahead and to the sides.
tread depth. See Tires on
shift to a lower gear.
.
page 9‑52
.
Check the rearview mirror and
.
vehicle instruments often.
Turn off cruise control.
WARNING
{
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-9
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 8‑28 improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on
slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
Winter Driving
WARNING
{
Driving on Snow or Ice
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to
fall, resulting in even less traction.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You
could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy
when the surrounding roads are
clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your
own lane.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
on slippery surfaces.
.
.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
Top of hills: Be alert —
something could be in your lane
(stalled car, accident).
surface under the tires even more.
Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-10
Driving and Operating
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside
Service on page 12‑8. To get
help and keep everyone in the
vehicle safe:
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑22.
.
Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
Snow can trap exhaust gases
under your vehicle. This can
cause deadly CO (carbon
.
Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so
you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
exhaust.
flashers.
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside
.
Open a window about 5 cm
mirror.
(two inches) on the side of
the vehicle that is away from
the wind to bring in fresh air.
WARNING
{
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
.
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside the
vehicle and set the fan speed
to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the
Index.
To save fuel, run the engine for
only short periods as needed to
warm the vehicle and then shut the
engine off and close the window
most of the way to save heat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-11
Repeat this until help arrives
but only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold.
Moving about to keep warm also
helps.
Release the accelerator pedal while
shifting, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the
WARNING
{
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward
and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. If that does not get the
vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see
Towing the Vehicle on page 9‑105.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
above 55 km/h (35 mph) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 9‑74.
Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how
much weight the vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory‐installed options.
If the Vehicle is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any traction
system. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission
wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears.
If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the
rocking method.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-12
Driving and Operating
Two labels on the vehicle show
how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification label.
Tire and Loading Information
Label
positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows
the tire size of the original
equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation
see Tires on page 9‑52 and Tire
WARNING
{
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
Pressure on page 9‑59
.
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also,
There is also important loading
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axle. See “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle's center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's
door open, you will find the label
attached near the door lock
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-13
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
1. Locate the statement
“The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
placard.
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
Example 1
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
(300 lbs).
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and
there will be five 150 lb
C. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).
See Trailer Towing on page 8‑54
for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules and trailering tips.
passengers in your vehicle,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-14
Driving and Operating
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2
Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg
(750 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification
label is attached to the lower
center pillar on the driver's side
of the vehicle. The label tells the
gross weight capacity of the
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR).
C. Available Cargo Weight =
113 kg (250 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-15
The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo. Never exceed
the GVWR for the vehicle, or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
.
Never stack heavier
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to
lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
If the vehicle is carrying a heavy
load, it should be spread out.
See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this
section.
.
.
.
Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure
it whenever you can.
WARNING
{
Things you put inside the
vehicle can strike and injure
people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
WARNING
{
Do not leave a seat folded
down unless you need to.
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
.
Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. In the
cargo area, put them as
far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight
evenly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-16
Driving and Operating
can be used. Vehicle speeds
above 110 km/h (68 mph)
should be limited to
Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal
If the vehicle has this feature, the
position of the throttle and brake
pedals can be adjusted.
Starting and
Operating
five minutes per use.
New Vehicle Break-In
.
Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 miles) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
linings.
Notice: The vehicle does not
need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
The switch used to adjust the
pedals is located on the right side of
the steering column, below the
wiper stalk. Pull the switch toward
you to move the pedals further from
the floor, or push the switch away
from you to move the pedals closer
to the floor.
.
Do not drive at any one
constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 805 km
(500 miles). Do not make
full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or
slow the vehicle.
Adjust the throttle and brake pedals
while the vehicle is in P (Park). The
throttle and brake pedals can also
be adjusted while driving. The
adjustable pedals are not operable
when the cruise control is engaged.
.
Do not tow a trailer during
break-in. See Driving
.
During the first 1 000 km
Characteristics and Towing
Tips on page 8‑50 for the
trailer towing capabilities of
your vehicle and more
information.
(600 miles), avoid using more
than moderate acceleration
in lower gears and avoid
vehicle speeds above
110 km/h (68 mph).
Following break‐in, engine speed
and load can be gradually
increased.
.
Between the first 1 000 km
(600 miles) and 5 000 km
(3,000 miles), heavy
acceleration in lower gears
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-17
To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle
must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN mode and the brake
pedal must be applied.
ACC/ACCESSORY: This position
allows you to use some electrical
accessories when the engine is off.
Ignition Positions
With the ignition off, pressing the
button one time without the brake
pedal applied, will place the ignition
system in ACC/ACCESSORY.
OFF: When this button is pressed
with the engine running, the engine
will be turned off.
If the vehicle is in P (Park), the
ignition will turn OFF, and Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) will remain
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 8‑18 for
more information.
The ignition will switch from
ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF after
five minutes to prevent battery
run down.
ON/RUN/START: This position is
for driving and starting. With the
ignition off, and the brake pedal
applied, pressing the button once
will place the ignition system in
ON/RUN/START. Once engine
cranking begins, release the button.
Engine cranking will continue until
the engine starts. See Starting the
Gasoline Engine on page 8‑18 for
more information. The ignition will
then remain in ON/RUN.
If the vehicle is not in P (Park),
the ignition will return to ACC/
ACCESSORY and display the
message “Shift to Park” in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 4‑29 for more information.
When the vehicle is shifted into
P (Park), the ignition system will
switch to OFF.
The vehicle has an electronic
keyless ignition with push‐button
start.
Pressing the button cycles it through
three modes, ACC/ACCESSORY,
ON/RUN/START and OFF.
If the push-button start is not
working, the vehicle may be near a
strong radio antenna signal causing
interference to the keyless entry
system. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑29 for
more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-18
Driving and Operating
To place the ignition in ON/RUN/
START from OFF without starting
the engine, press the button two
times without your foot on the brake
pedal.
Power to the audio system will
continue to operate for up to
10 minutes or until the driver door is
opened.
Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
Power to the power windows,
sunroof and outlets under the
climate control system, inside the
center floor console, and on the rear
of the center floor console will
continue to operate for up to
10 minutes or until any door is
opened.
The battery could be drained if you
leave the ignition in the ON/RUN/
START position with the engine off.
You may not be able to start the
vehicle if the battery is allowed to
drain for an extended period of time.
The keyless access transmitter must
be inside the vehicle for the ignition
to work.
Cell phone chargers can interfere
with the operation of the Keyless
Access System. Battery chargers
should not be plugged in when
starting or turning off the engine.
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
All these features will work when the
vehicle is in ON/RUN/START.
To start the vehicle:
These vehicle accessories can be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
engine is turned off:
Starting Procedure
Starting the Gasoline
Engine
Place the transmission in the proper
gear by moving the shift lever to
P (Park) or N (Neutral). To restart
the engine when the vehicle is
already moving, use N (Neutral).
1. With the brake pedal applied,
press the START button located
on the instrument panel. See
Ignition Positions on page 8‑17.
.
Audio System
.
Power Windows
.
Sunroof (if equipped)
2. When the engine begins
cranking, let go of the button and
the engine cranks automatically
until it starts.
.
Power outlets under the climate
control system, inside the center
floor console, and on the rear of
the center floor console.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-19
If the transmitter is not in
If the engine does not start
after 5-10 seconds, especially
in very cold weather (below
−18°C or 0°F), it could be
flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor
while cranking for up to
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
the vehicle or something is
interfering with the transmitter,
the Driver Information Center
(DIC) will display No Remote
Detected. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 4‑29 for
more information.
starting the engine and protects
components. Once cranking has
been initiated, the engine continues
cranking for a few seconds or until
the vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start, cranking automatically
stops after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To prevent
gear damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine is
already running.
15 seconds.
If the battery in the keyless
access transmitter needs
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by pressing
the START button immediately
after cranking has ended, can
overheat and damage the
cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down.
replacing, the DIC displays
Replace Battery In Remote Key.
The vehicle can still be driven.
See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on
page 1‑3 for more information.
Notice: The engine is designed to
work with the electronics in the
vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change
the way the engine operates.
Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform
3. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and
transmission gently until the oil
warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
When the engine starts, let go of the
accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
4. If the engine does not start and
no DIC message is displayed,
wait 15 seconds before trying
again to let the cranking motor
cool down.
properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-20
Driving and Operating
Engine Heater
The engine coolant heater,
Shifting Into Park
WARNING
{
WARNING
Plugging the cord into an
{
if available, can help in cold weather
conditions at or below −18°C (0°F)
for easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least
four hours before starting the
vehicle. An internal thermostat in
the plug-end of the cord will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above −18°C (0°F).
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow.
To Use The Engine Coolant
Heater
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts.
If you do not it could be
1. Turn off the engine.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord. The cord is
See Parking Brake on
page 8‑29 for more information.
located near the air cleaner.
damaged.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer
in the area where you will be
parking the vehicle for the best
advice on this.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by pushing the lever all the way
toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Shifting Out of Park
8-21
See if you can move the shift lever
away from P (Park) without first
pulling it toward you. If you can, it
means that the shift lever was not
fully locked into P (Park).
Leaving the Vehicle With
the Engine Running
This vehicle is equipped with an
electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is designed to
prevent movement of the shift lever
out of P (Park), unless the ignition is
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
and the brake pedal is applied
WARNING
{
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it
could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight
of the vehicle puts too much
force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. This happens when
parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not
done properly and then it is difficult
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)"
listed previously.
The shift lock release is always
functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
page 9‑101
.
If you have to leave the vehicle
with the engine running, be sure
the vehicle is in P (Park) and the
parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you have moved
the shift lever into P (Park), hold
down the regular brake pedal.
To shift out of P (Park):
If torque lock does occur, your
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park).
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-22
Driving and Operating
If you still are unable to shift out of
P (Park):
Engine Exhaust
WARNING (Continued)
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
.
.
WARNING
{
The vehicle’s exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button
again.
There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or after-market
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional
towing service.
.
The vehicle idles in areas
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
Parking Over Things
That Burn
.
The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
.
Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
.
WARNING
{
The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-23
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
Automatic
Transmission
The shift lever is located on the
center console between the front
seats.
WARNING
{
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do
not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
WARNING
{
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑22.
Follow the proper steps to be sure
the vehicle will not move. See
Shifting Into Park on page 8‑20.
There are several different positions
for the shift lever.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 8‑50.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-24
Driving and Operating
P (Park): This position locks the
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
transmission shift lock control
system. You must fully apply the
regular brakes first and then press
the shift lever button before you can
shift from P (Park) when the ignition
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
of P (Park), ease pressure on the
shift lever and push the shift lever
all the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then
press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of Park on
WARNING
{
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse)
can be used to rock the vehicle
back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your
transmission. See If the Vehicle is
Stuck on page 8‑11 for additional
information.
Do not leave the vehicle when
the engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
page 8‑21
.
page 8‑20. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 8‑50.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-25
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart when the vehicle
is already moving, use N (Neutral)
only. You can also use N (Neutral)
when the vehicle is being towed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)
or N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
Downshifting the transmission in
slippery road conditions could result
in skidding, see Skidding under
Loss of Control on page 8‑6.
Notice: Spinning the tires
or holding the vehicle in one
place on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage
the transmission. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When
stopping on a hill, use the brakes
to hold the vehicle in place.
WARNING
{
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
.
Going less than 35 mph
(55 km/h), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h)
or more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
The transmission will shift down
to a lower gear and have more
power.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-26
Driving and Operating
An S will be displayed in
the DIC.
Manual Mode
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Within Sport Mode there is a
further performance feature
called Performance Mode Lift
Foot (PMLF) Mode. The feature
is activated automatically when
sports oriented driving is
detected, based on cornering
and on/off throttle application.
PMLF allows the transmission to
hold the current gear instead of
upshifting when the throttle is
lifted.
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
at high RPMs without upshifting
while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage the
vehicle. Always upshift when
necessary while using DSC.
Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows
you to shift an automatic
transmission similar to a manual
transmission. To use the DSC
feature:
The tachometer display on the
instrument panel cluster will show
which gear the vehicle is in. The
number indicates the requested
gear range when moving the shift
lever forward or rearward. See
Tachometer on page 4‑15 for more
information.
2. To enter M (Manual Mode), press
the shift lever forward to upshift
or rearward to downshift.
1. Move the shift lever to the left
from D (Drive) to
M (Manual Mode).
An M will be displayed in
the DIC.
If you do not move the shift lever
forward or rearward, the vehicle
will be in Sport Mode. When you
are in Sport Mode the vehicle
will still shift automatically. The
transmission may remain in a
gear longer than it would in the
normal driving mode based on
braking, throttle input, and
While using the DSC feature, the
vehicle will have firmer, quicker
shifting. You can use this for
sport driving or when climbing or
descending hills, to stay in gear
longer, or to down shift for more
power or engine braking.
vehicle lateral acceleration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-27
The transmission will only allow
you to shift into gears appropriate
for the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The
transmission will not automatically
shift to the next lower gear if the
engine RPM is too high, nor to the
next higher gear when the maximum
engine RPM is reached.
When fuel economy mode is on:
Fuel Economy Mode
.
The transmission will upshift
The vehicle may have a fuel
economy mode. When engaged,
fuel economy mode can improve
the vehicle's fuel economy.
sooner, and downshift later.
.
The torque converter will
lock–up sooner, and stay on
longer.
.
The gas pedal will be less
sensitive.
If shifting is prevented for any
reason, the currently selected gear
will flash multiple times, indicating
that the transmission has not shifted
gears.
.
The vehicle's computers will
more aggressively shut off fuel
to the engine under deceleration.
While in the DSC mode, the
transmission will automatically
downshift when the vehicle comes
to a stop. This will allow for more
power during take-off.
Pressing the eco button by the shift
lever will engage fuel economy
mode. When activated, the eco light
in the instrument cluster will come
on. See Fuel Economy Light on
page 4‑27. Pressing the button a
second time will turn fuel economy
mode off.
When accelerating the vehicle from
a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear ratio allows you
to gain more traction on slippery
surfaces.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-28
Driving and Operating
If driving safely on a wet road and
it becomes necessary to slam on
the brakes and continue braking
to avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the
brakes at each wheel.
Drive Systems
Brakes
All-Wheel Drive
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that
helps prevent a braking skid.
With this feature, engine power is
always sent to all four wheels. It is
fully automatic, and adjusts itself as
needed for road conditions.
When using a compact spare tire
on an AWD vehicle, the system
automatically detects the compact
spare and disables AWD. To restore
AWD operation and prevent
excessive wear on system, replace
the compact spare with a full-size
tire as soon as possible. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 9‑100
for more information.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 4‑24
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-29
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
The system has a Park Brake
Status light and a Park Brake
Parking Brake
Warning light. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 4‑23. There
are also three Driver Information
Center (DIC) messages. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑29 for more information. In
case of insufficient electrical power,
the EPB cannot be applied or
released.
Using ABS
Before leaving the vehicle, check
the park brake status lamp to insure
the park brake is applied.
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. The ABS pump or motor
might be heard operating, and the
brake pedal might be felt to pulsate,
but this is normal.
The vehicle has an Electric Parking
Brake (EPB). The switch for the
EPB is in the center console. The
EPB can always be activated, even
if the ignition is OFF. To avoid
draining the battery, do not cycle
the EPB too often without the
engine running. The EPB can be left
applied while the vehicle is parked.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-30
Driving and Operating
If the park brake status light flashes
continuously, the EPB is only
partially applied or released,
EPB Apply
EPB Release
The EPB can be applied any time
the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is
applied by momentarily lifting up on
the EPB switch. Once fully applied,
the park brake status light will be
on. While the brake is being applied,
the status lamp will flash until full
apply is reached. If the light does
not come on, or remains flashing,
you need to have the vehicle
serviced. Do not drive the vehicle if
the park brake status light is
flashing. See your dealer/retailer.
See Brake System Warning Light
on page 4‑23 for more information.
To release the EPB, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position,
apply and hold the brake pedal, and
push down momentarily on the EPB
switch. If you attempt to release
the EPB without the brake pedal
applied, a chime will sound, and the
DIC message “Step On Brake to
Release Park Brake” will be
displayed. The EPB is released
when the park brake status light
is off.
or there is a problem with the EPB.
The DIC message “Service Parking
Brake” will be displayed. If this light
flashes continuously, release the
EPB, and attempt to apply it again.
If this light continues to flash, do not
drive the vehicle. See your dealer/
retailer.
If the park brake warning light is on,
the EPB has detected an error in
another system and is operating
with reduced functionality. To apply
the EPB when this light is on, lift up
on the EPB switch and hold it in the
up position. Full application of the
parking brake by the EPB system
may take a longer period of time
than normal when this light is on.
Continue to hold the switch until the
park brake status light remains on.
If the park brake warning light is on,
see your dealer/retailer.
If the park brake warning light is on,
the EPB has detected an error in
another system and is operating
with reduced functionality. To
release the EPB when this light is
on, push down on the EPB switch
and hold it in the down position.
If the EPB is applied while the
vehicle is in motion, a chime will
sound, and the DIC message
“Release Park Brake” will be
displayed. The vehicle will
decelerate as long as the switch is
held in the up position. Releasing
the EPB switch during the
deceleration will release the parking
brake. If the switch is held in the up
position until the vehicle comes to a
stop, the EPB will remain applied.
If the EPB fails to apply, the rear
wheels should be blocked to
prevent vehicle movement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
8-31
EPB release may take a longer
period of time than normal when
this light is on. Continue to hold the
switch until the park brake status
light is off. If the light is on, see your
dealer/retailer.
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the driver
in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle. The
stability system hydraulic brake
control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates.
Minor brake pedal pulsations or
pedal movement during this time is
normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates.
The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist
(HSA) feature, which may be useful
when the vehicle is stopped on a
grade. This feature is designed to
prevent the vehicle from rolling,
either forward or rearward, during
vehicle drive off. After driver
completely stops and holds the
vehicle in a complete standstill on a
grade, HSA will be automatically
activated. During the transition
period between when the driver
releases the brake pedal and starts
to accelerate to drive off on a grade,
HSA holds the braking pressure to
ensure that there is no rolling back.
The brakes will automatically
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before
driving.
Automatic EPB Release
The EPB will automatically release
if the vehicle is running, placed into
gear and an attempt is made to
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration
when the EPB is applied, to
release when the accelerator pedal
is applied within the two second
window. It will not activate if the
vehicle is in a drive gear and facing
downhill or if the vehicle is facing
uphill and in R (Reverse).
preserve park brake lining life.
If you are towing a trailer and
parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 8‑50 for more information.
decreased.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-32
Driving and Operating
TCS automatically comes on
When this message is displayed
Ride Control Systems
whenever the vehicle is started.
To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, the system
should always be left on. But, TCS
can be turned off if needed.
and d comes on and stays on, the
vehicle is safe to drive but the
system is not operational. Driving
should be adjusted accordingly.
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The vehicle may have a Traction
Control System (TCS) that limits
wheel spin. On a front-wheel-drive
vehicle, the system operates if it
senses that one or both of the front
wheels are spinning or beginning to
lose traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive
(AWD) vehicle, the system will
operate if it senses that any of the
wheels are spinning or beginning to
lose traction. When this happens,
the system brakes the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
If d comes on and stays on, reset
the system by:
1. Stopping the vehicle.
2. Turning the engine off and
waiting 15 seconds.
3. Starting the engine.
TCS/StabiliTrak Light
d flashes to indicate that the
traction control system is active.
If d still comes on and stays on, the
vehicle needs service.
If there is a problem detected with
TCS, “Service Traction Control” is
displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Ride Control
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working, but this is
normal.
System Messages on page 4‑38
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
StabiliTrak System
8-33
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake
or accelerate heavily when TCS is
off. The vehicle's driveline could
be damaged.
Driving should be adjusted
accordingly. Press and
The vehicle may have a vehicle
stability enhancement system called
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
release d again to turn the
system back on.
When TCS is turned off on AWD
vehicles, the system may still make
noise. This is normal and necessary
with AWD hardware.
computer controlled system that
assists with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
StabiliTrak activates when the
It may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle gets stuck
in sand, mud or snow and rocking
the vehicle is required. See If the
Vehicle is Stuck on page 8‑11 for
more information. See also Winter
Driving on page 8‑9 for
computer senses a difference
between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer
the vehicle in the intended direction.
TCS/StabiliTrak Button
d is located on the console.
information on using TCS when
driving in snowy or icy conditions.
StabiliTrak comes on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started. To
assist with directional control of the
vehicle, the system should always
be left on.
Adding non‐GM accessories can
affect the vehicle's performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 9‑3 for more information.
TCS Off Light
TCS can be turned off by pressing
and releasing d . When TCS is
turned off, i comes on and the
system will not limit wheel spin.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-34
Driving and Operating
When this message is displayed
and d comes on and stays on,
the vehicle is safe to drive but the
system is not operational. Driving
should be adjusted accordingly.
If d comes on and stays on, reset
TCS/StabiliTrak Light
StabiliTrak Off
Light
TCS Off Light
the system by:
When the stability control system
1. Stopping the vehicle.
activates, d flashes on the
StabiliTrak can be turned off
if needed by pressing and
instrument panel. This also occurs
when traction control is activated.
A noise may be heard or vibration
may be felt in the brake pedal. This
is normal. Continue to steer the
vehicle in the intended direction.
2. Turning the engine off and
waiting 15 seconds.
holding d until g and i come on
the instrument panel. When
StabiliTrak is turned off, the system
will not assist with directional control
of the vehicle or limit wheel spin.
Driving should be adjusted
3. Starting the engine.
If d still comes on and stays on, the
vehicle needs service.
If there is a problem detected with
StabiliTrak, “Service StabiliTrak” is
displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Ride Control
accordingly. Press and
release d again to turn the
system back on.
System Messages on page 4‑38
.
If cruise control is being used
when StabiliTrak activates, cruise
control will automatically disengage.
Press the cruise control button to
reengage when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
TCS/StabiliTrak Button
d is located on the console.
page 8‑35 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-35
TOUR: Use for normal city and
highway driving. This setting
provides a smooth, soft ride.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Cruise Control
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle
can give more traction on snow,
mud, ice, sand or gravel. When
traction is low, this feature allows
the drive wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle.
WARNING
{
SPORT: Use where road conditions
or personal preference demand
more control. This setting provides
more “feel”, or response to road
conditions through increased
steering effort and suspension
control. Transmission shift points
and shift firmness are also
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Selective Ride Control
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
The vehicle may have a ride
control system called Selective Ride
Control. The setting can be changed
at any time. Based on road
conditions, steering wheel angle
and the vehicle speed, the system
automatically adjusts to provide the
best handling while providing a
smooth ride. The Tour and Sport
modes will feel similar on a
enhanced. See Manual Mode on
page 8‑26 in Automatic
Transmission.
If there is a problem detected with
Selective Ride Control, “Service
Suspension System” displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Ride Control System Messages
on page 4‑38. Driving should be
adjusted accordingly.
With cruise control, a speed of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can
be maintained without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
smooth road.
To switch from TOUR to SPORT
mode, move the shift lever to the
left while the transmission is in
D (Drive).
If the brakes are applied, the cruise
control shuts off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-36
Driving and Operating
If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak®
system and begins to limit wheel
spin while using cruise control, the
cruise control automatically
disengages. See StabiliTrak System
on page 8‑33 or Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 8‑32. When
road conditions allow the cruise
control to be safely used, you can
apply the cruise control again.
T (On/Off): Press to turn the
WARNING
{
system on and off.
If you leave your cruise control on
when you are not using cruise,
you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to
use cruise control.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):
Press to make the vehicle
accelerate or resume to a previously
set speed.
SET − (Set/Coast): Press to set
the speed or make the vehicle
slow down.
[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
1. Press T .
2. Get up to the desired speed.
Setting Cruise Control
3. Press the SET− button located
on the steering wheel and
release it.
Cruise control will not work if the
parking brake is set, or if the master
cylinder brake fluid level is low.
4. Take your foot off the
accelerator.
The cruise control light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on
after the cruise control has been set
to the desired speed.
Cruise Control
The cruise control buttons are
located on the left side of the
steering wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-37
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Cruise
Control is at a Set Speed
the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the
vehicle speed down. If the brake is
applied the cruise control
If the brakes or cruise cancel button
are applied while the cruise control
is at a set speed, the cruise control
disengages. But it does not need to
be reset.
To reduce the vehicle speed while
the cruise control is at a set speed:
.
Press and hold the SET– button
on the steering wheel until the
desired lower speed is reached,
and then release the button.
If the vehicle has a previously
stored set speed, and is traveling
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,
press the +RES button once on the
steering wheel, and the vehicle
returns to the previously selected
speed and stays there.
disengages.
.
To slow down in very small
Ending Cruise Control
amounts, press the SET– button
on the steering wheel briefly.
Each time this is done, the
vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) slower.
There are three ways to end cruise
control:
.
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
Increasing Speed While Cruise
Control is at a Set Speed
.
Press the [ button on the
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
steering wheel.
To increase the cruise speed while
the cruise control is at a set speed:
.
Press the T button on the
steering wheel.
Use the accelerator pedal to
.
Press and hold the +RES button
increase your vehicle speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the cruise
control speed that was set earlier.
on the steering wheel until the
new desired speed is reached,
and then release the button.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed
memory is erased, when the cruise
control or the ignition is turned off.
.
To increase vehicle speed in
Using Cruise Control on Hills
small increments, press the
+RES button. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
How well the cruise control will work
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness of
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-38
Driving and Operating
How the System Works
Object Detection
Systems
WARNING
{
When the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse) the front and rear
sensors are automatically turned on,
after the vehicle is shifted out of
R (Reverse), the rear sensors are
turned off and the front sensors stay
on until the vehicle is above a
certain speed. The front sensors
may also be turned on by pressing
the park assist button located next
to the shift lever without shifting into
R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
traveling at a low speed. See
“Turning the System On and Off”
later in this section.
The Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Park Assist (UFRPA) system
does not replace driver vision.
It cannot detect:
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic
Front and Rear Parking Assist
(UFRPA) system, it assists the
driver with parking and avoiding
objects. UFRPA operates at speeds
less than 8 km/h (5 mph), and the
sensors on the front and rear
bumper detect objects up to 1.2 m
(4 ft) in front of the vehicle and 2.5 m
(8 ft) behind the vehicle, and at least
25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground.
.
objects that are below the
bumper, underneath the
vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle
.
children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
If you do not use proper care
before moving forward and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury,
or death could occur. Even with
UFRPA, always check in front of
the vehicle before moving forward
and behind the vehicle before
backing up. While moving forward
and backing, be sure to look for
objects and check the vehicle's
mirrors.
When the vehicle is in N (Neutral),
the system may be active. If the
vehicle is in a car wash, the sensors
may detect objects in the car wash.
See “Turning the System On and
Off” later in this section to turn the
system off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-39
High-toned beeps heard from the
front speakers are for objects
detected near the front bumper.
Low-toned beeps heard from the
rear speakers are for objects
detected near the rear bumper.
Front Display
The front display is located in the
instrument panel in the center of the
speedometer and has four bars to
provide distance and system
information.
When an object is detected, high or
low‐tone beeps are heard. As the
vehicle gets closer to an object, the
time between the beeps becomes
shorter. When the distance is less
than 30 cm (11.8 in), beeping is
continuous. The distance may be
less during warmer or humid
weather.
The following describes how the UFRPA front display lights appear as the
vehicle gets closer to a detected object:
PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) to
indicate that UFRPA is off. The
message disappears after a short
period of time.
Description
one amber bar
Metric
1.2 m
1.0 m
0.6 m
0.3 m
English
4 ft
two amber bars
40 in
23 in
1 ft
three amber bars
three amber bars and one red bar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-40
Driving and Operating
.
.
.
If an object is attached to the
front of the vehicle.
Turning the System On and Off
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
The UFRPA system can be turned
on and off by pressing the park
assist button located next to the
shift lever.
A tow bar is attached to the
vehicle.
If UFRPA does not turn on due to a
temporary condition, the message
PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the
DIC, and the light on the park assist
button turns off. This can occur
under the following conditions:
The vehicle's bumper is
damaged. Take the vehicle to
your dealer/retailer to repair the
system.
.
.
The ultrasonic sensors are not
clean. Keep the vehicle's
bumpers free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
Other conditions may affect
system performance, such as
vibrations from a jackhammer or
the compression of air brakes on
a very large truck.
The park assist button lights up
when the system is on and turns off
when it has been disabled.
on page 9‑109
.
If the system is still disabled, after
driving forward at least 25 km/h
(15 mph), take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
.
A trailer was attached to the
vehicle, or an object was
hanging out of the liftgate during
the last drive cycle. Once the
attached object is removed,
UFRPA will return to normal
operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-41
An image appears on the navigation
screen with the message “Check
Surroundings for Safety” when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
The navigation screen goes to the
previous screen after approximately
10 seconds once the vehicle is
shifted out of R (Reverse).
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC)
The vehicle may have a Rear Vision
Camera system. Read this entire
section before using it.
WARNING (Continued)
Do not back the vehicle by only
looking at the RVC screen, or use
the screen during longer, higher
speed backing maneuvers or
where there could be cross-traffic.
Your judged distances using the
screen will differ from actual
distances.
The rear vision camera system can
assist the driver when backing up by
displaying a view of the area behind
the vehicle.
To cancel the delay, do one of the
following:
.
Press a hard key on the
WARNING
So if you do not use proper care
before backing up, you could
hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,
bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death.
Even though the vehicle has the
RVC system, always check
carefully before backing up by
checking behind and around the
vehicle.
{
navigation system.
.
Shift in to P (Park).
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
system does not replace driver
vision. RVC does not:
.
Reach a vehicle speed of
8 km/h (5 mph).
.
Detect objects that are
outside the camera's field of
view, below the bumper,
or underneath the vehicle.
.
Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-42
Driving and Operating
Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System On or Off
Symbols
Guidelines
The navigation system may have a
feature that lets the driver view
symbols on the navigation screen
while using the rear vision camera.
The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
(URPA) system must not be
disabled to use the caution symbols.
The error message “Rear Parking
Assist Symbols Unavailable” may
display if URPA has been disabled
and the symbols have been turned
on. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
The RVC system has a guideline
overlay that can help the driver align
the vehicle when backing into a
parking spot.
To turn the rear vision camera
system on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the CONFIG button.
3. Select Display.
To turn the guidelines on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the CONFIG button.
3. Select Display.
4. Select Guidelines. When a
check mark appears next to the
Guidelines option, guidelines will
appear.
on page 8‑38
.
The symbols appear and may cover
an object when viewing the
navigation screen when an object is
detected by the URPA system.
Rear Vision Camera Error
Messages
SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERA
SYSTEM: This message can
display when the system is not
receiving information it requires from
other vehicle systems.
To turn the symbols on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
4. Select Camera. When a check
mark appears next to the
Camera option, then the RVC
system is on.
2. Press the CONFIG button.
3. Select Display.
If any other problem occurs or if a
problem persists, see your dealer/
retailer.
4. Select Symbols. When a check
mark appears next to the
Symbols option, symbols will
appear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-43
It does not display objects that are
close to either corner or under the
bumper and can vary depending
on vehicle orientation or road
Rear Vision Camera Location
conditions. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen is
different from the actual distance.
The following illustration shows the
field of view that the camera
provides.
The camera is located above the
license plate.
The area displayed by the camera
is limited.
A. View displayed by the camera.
B. Corner of the rear bumper.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-44
Driving and Operating
When the System Does Not
Seem To Work Properly
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is
an important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
The rear vision camera system may
not work properly or display a clear
image if:
.
The RVC is turned off. See
“Turning the Rear Camera
System On or Off” earlier in this
section.
.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
It is dark.
.
The sun or the beam of
headlights is shining directly into
the camera lens.
.
Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a soft
cloth.
.
The back of the vehicle is in an
accident, the position and
mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can
be affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
dealer/retailer.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) shows
the code letter or number that
identifies the vehicle's engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-45
The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) on
If the vehicle has the 2.8L V6 engine
(VIN Code 4), use premium
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should
meet ASTM specification D 4814
in the United States or CAN/
CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.
Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
on page 8‑46 for additional
information.
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 91 or higher. For
best performance, use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 93. In an
page 11‑1
.
Recommended Fuel
If the vehicle has the 3.0L V6 engine
(VIN Code Y), use regular unleaded
gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
is less than 87, an audible knocking
noise, commonly referred to as
spark knock, might be heard when
driving. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. If heavy
knocking is heard when using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher, the engine needs service.
emergency, you can use regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane
fuel is used, do not perform any
aggressive driving maneuvers such
as wide open throttle applications.
You might also hear audible spark
knock during acceleration. Refill the
tank with premium fuel as soon as
possible to avoid damaging the
engine. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
91octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-46
Driving and Operating
California Fuel
Requirements
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
If you plan on driving in another
country outside the United States or
Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded
gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text
on fuel. Costly repairs caused by
use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards, it is
designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California emissions
standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
required to contain additives that
help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing the
emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean,
or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER
label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
be affected. The malfunction
To check the fuel availability, ask an
auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 4‑20. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of
fuel used, repairs might not be
detergency standards developed by
the auto companies. A list of
covered by the vehicle warranty.
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-47
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
tank at every engine oil change,
can help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
System Treatment PLUS is the only
gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors. It is available at
your dealer/retailer.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Some gasolines that are
not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the
performance of the emission control
system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines might be
available in your area. We
recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-48
Driving and Operating
Lamp could turn on. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
Filling the Tank
page 4‑20
.
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
or when refueling the vehicle. Do
not use cellular phones. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking
materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be
badly burned. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
The tethered fuel cap is located
behind a hinged fuel door on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
To open the fuel door, push the
rearward center edge in and release
and it will open.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Exterior Care on page 9‑109.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it
slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered
fuel cap from the hook on the
fuel door.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn
it clockwise until it clicks once.
Make sure the cap is fully installed.
When reinstalling the cap, turn it
clockwise until it clicks once,
otherwise the Malfunction Indicator
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-49
The diagnostic system can
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNING (Continued)
determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into
the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4‑20.
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact
with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.
WARNING
{
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
and others:
WARNING
{
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
.
.
Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.
Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel.
.
Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.
Notice: If a new fuel cap is
needed, be sure to get the right
type of cap from your dealer/
retailer. The wrong type fuel cap
might not fit properly, might
cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light, and could damage
the fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 4‑20.
.
Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-50
Driving and Operating
vehicle — such as a motorhome,
see Recreational Vehicle Towing on
The vehicle can tow a trailer when
equipped with the proper trailer
towing equipment. For trailering
capacity, see Trailer Towing on
page 8‑54. Trailering changes
handling, acceleration, braking,
durability and fuel economy. With
the added weight, the engine,
transmission, wheel assemblies and
tires are forced to work harder and
under greater loads. The trailer also
adds wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements. For safe
trailering, correctly use the proper
trailering equipment.
Towing
page 9‑105
.
General Towing
Information
Only use towing equipment that has
been designed for the vehicle.
Contact your dealer/retailer or
trailering retailer for assistance with
preparing the vehicle for towing a
trailer.
Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips
WARNING
{
The driver can lose control when
pulling a trailer if the correct
equipment is not used or the
vehicle is not driven properly.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well — or even at all. The driver
and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may
also be damaged; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
only if all the steps in this section
have been followed. Ask your
dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer
with the vehicle.
See the following trailer towing
information in this section:
.
For information on driving while
towing a trailer, see “Driving
Characteristics and
Towing Tips”.
The following information has
important trailering tips and rules
for your safety and that of your
passengers. Read this section
carefully before pulling a trailer.
.
For maximum vehicle and trailer
weights, see “Trailer Towing”.
.
Pulling A Trailer
For information on equipment to
tow a trailer, see “Towing
Equipment”.
Here are some important points:
.
There are many laws, including
For information on towing a disabled
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 9‑105. For information on
speed limit restrictions that apply
to trailering. Check for legal
requirements with state or
provincial police.
towing the vehicle behind another
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-51
.
.
Do not tow a trailer at all during
the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)
the new vehicle is driven. The
engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing with a Stability Control
System
Towing a trailer requires experience.
Get familiar with handling and
braking with the added trailer
weight. The vehicle is now longer
and not as responsive as the
vehicle is by itself.
When towing, the sound of the
stability control system might be
heard. The system is reacting to the
vehicle movement caused by the
trailer, which mainly occurs during
cornering. This is normal when
towing heavier trailers.
During the first 800 km
(500 miles) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
(50 mph) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This reduces wear
on the vehicle.
Check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains,
electrical connectors, lamps, tires
and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start the vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply
the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes are working.
Following Distance
.
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Use a lower gear if the
transmission shifts too often.
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations
that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.
.
.
Do not use the Fuel Saver Mode
when towing.
During the trip, check regularly to be
sure that the load is secure, and the
lamps and trailer brakes are working
properly.
Obey speed limit restrictions.
Do not drive faster than the
maximum posted speed for
trailers, or no more than 90 km/h
(55 mph), to reduce wear on the
vehicle.
Passing
More passing distance is needed
when towing a trailer. Because the
rig is longer, it is necessary to go
farther beyond the passed vehicle
before returning to the lane.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-52
Driving and Operating
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Use a lower gear if the transmission
shifts too often.
Backing Up
Turn Signals When Towing a
Trailer
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. To move the
trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone
The turn signal indicators on the
instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer
lamps also flash, telling other
drivers the vehicle is turning,
changing lanes or stopping.
When towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, engine coolant
boils at a lower temperature than at
normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing
at high altitude on steep uphill
grades, the vehicle could show
signs similar to engine overheating.
To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked, preferably on level
ground, with the transmission in
P (Park) for a few minutes before
turning the engine off. If the
guide you.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on
the instrument panel flash for turns
even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
overheat warning comes on, see
Engine Overheating on page 9‑20.
Driving On Grades
When turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal so the
trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Use the turn signal well in
advance and avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers.
Reduce speed and shift to a
lower gear before starting down a
long or steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down, the
brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no
longer work well.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-53
If parking the rig on a hill:
Parking on Hills
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
the wheels into the curb if facing
downhill or into traffic if facing
uphill.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
while you:
WARNING
{
.
Start the engine.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with
the trailer attached can be
.
Shift into a gear.
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
.
Release the parking brake.
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the brake pedal
until the chocks absorb the load.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift
into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-54
Driving and Operating
Maintenance When Trailer
Towing
Engine Cooling When Trailer
Towing
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See this
manual's Maintenance Schedule or
Index for more information. Things
that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Inspect these before
and during the trip.
The cooling system may temporarily
overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
It depends on how the rig is used.
For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and
how much the vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can
depend on any special equipment
on the vehicle, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more
on page 9‑20
.
Trailer Towing
Before pulling a trailer, there are
three important considerations that
have to do with weight:
.
The weight of the trailer
information.
Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
.
The weight of the trailer tongue
Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the
.
The total weight on the vehicle's
tires
required trailering equipment. The
weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-55
Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.
Vehicle
Maximum Trailer Weight
1 588 kg (3,500 lbs)
1134 kg (2,500 lbs)
1 588 kg (3,500 lbs)
1134 kg (2,500 lbs)
1 588 kg (3,500 lbs)
GCWR*
2.8L Engine, AWD
3.0L Engine, FWD
3 725 kg (8,212 lbs)
3 187 kg (7,025 lbs)
3 640 kg (8,025 lbs)
3 271 kg (7,212 lbs)
3 725 kg (8,212 lbs)
3.0L Engine, FWD with Trailering Package
3.0L Engine, AWD
3.0L Engine, AWD with Trailering Package
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer/retailer for trailering
information or advice. See
Customer Assistance Offices on
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑11
for more information about the
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
If there are a lot of options,
page 12‑3 for more information.
vehicle's maximum load capacity.
equipment, passengers or cargo in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-56
Driving and Operating
Trailering may be limited by the
vehicle's ability to carry tongue
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating). The effect of
It has a GVWR of 3 266 kg
(7,200 lbs), a RGAWR of 1 814 kg
(4,000 lbs) and a GCWR (Gross
Combination Weight Rating) of
6 350 kg (14,000 lbs). The trailer
rating should be:
additional weight may reduce the
trailering capacity more than the
total of the additional weight.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is
2 495 kg (5,500 lbs); 1 270 kg
(2,800 lbs) at the front axle and
1 225 kg (2,700 lbs) at the rear axle.
If a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch is being
used, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10‐15 percent of the total
loaded trailer weight (B).
Expect tongue weight to be at least
10 percent of trailer weight (386 kg
(850 lbs)) and because the weight is
applied well behind the rear axle,
the effect on the rear axle is greater
than just the weight itself, as much
as 1.5 times as much. The weight
at the rear axle could be 386 kg
(850 lbs) X 1.5 = 578 kg (1,275 lbs).
After loading the trailer, weigh
the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-57
Since the rear axle already weighs
1 225 kg (2,700 lbs), adding 578 kg
(1,275 lbs) brings the total to
1 803 kg (3,975 lbs). This is very
close to, but within the limit for
RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set
to trailer up to 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs).
trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. The maximum trailer
would only be 3 538 kg (7,800 lbs).
You may go further and think the
tongue weight should be limited to
less than 454 kg (1,000 lbs) to avoid
exceeding GVWR. But the effect
on the rear axle must still be
considered. Because the rear axle
now weighs 1 406 kg (3,100 lbs),
408 kg (900 lbs) can be put on the
rear axle without exceeding
RGAWR. The effect of tongue
weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 408 kg (900 lbs)
by 1.5 leaves only 272 kg (600 lbs)
of tongue weight that can be
handled. Since tongue weight is
usually at least 10 percent of total
loaded trailer weight, expect that
the largest trailer the vehicle can
properly handle is 2 722 kg
It is important that the vehicle
does not exceed any of its
ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue
Weight. The only way to be sure it is
not exceeding any of these ratings
is to weigh the vehicle and trailer.
If the vehicle has many options and
there is a front seat passenger and
two rear seat passengers with some
luggage and gear in the vehicle as
well. 136 kg (300 lbs) could be
added to the front axle weight and
181 kg (400 lbs) to the rear axle
weight. The vehicle now weighs:
Total Weight on the Vehicle's
Tires
Be sure the vehicle's tires are
inflated to the upper limit for cold
tires. These numbers can be found
on the Certification label or see
Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑11
for more information. Make sure not
to go over the GVW limit for the
vehicle, or the GAWR, including the
weight of the trailer tongue. If using
a weight distributing hitch, make
sure not to go over the rear axle
limit before applying the weight
distribution spring bars.
(6,000 lbs).
Weight is still below 3 266 kg
(7,200 lbs) and you might think
318 additional kilograms (700 lbs)
should be subtracted from the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-58
Driving and Operating
Hitch Cover
To reinstall the hitch cover:
Towing Equipment
1. Hold the cover at a 45 degree
angle to the vehicle and push
the upper tabs in the hitch cover
into the slots in the fascia.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is
needed.
2. Move the bottom of the cover
forward until the lower tabs line
up with the lower fascia slots.
.
The rear bumper on the vehicle
3. Snap the hitch cover into place
by pushing the upper corners
forward.
is not intended for hitches. Do
not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
4. Turn the fasteners on the lower
tabs 90 degrees clockwise to
lock the cover in place.
The vehicle may have a hitch cover.
To remove the hitch cover:
.
Will any holes be made in the
body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If there
are, then be sure to seal the
holes later when the hitch is
removed. If the holes are not
sealed, dirt, water, and deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from the
exhaust can get into the vehicle.
See Engine Exhaust on
Safety Chains
1. Turn the fasteners on the
lower tabs 90 degrees
counterclockwise.
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Always leave just enough slack so
the rig can turn. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
2. Lift the lower edge of the cover
about 45 degrees.
3. Pull the cover downward to
disengage the upper
attachments.
page 8‑22
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-59
Trailer Brakes
Trailer Sway
Control (TSC)
The vehicle has a Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) feature as part of the
StabiliTrak system. If TSC detects
that the trailer is swaying, the
vehicle's brakes are automatically
applied.
Conversions and
Add-Ons
A loaded trailer that weighs more
than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to
have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the
trailer. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted and
maintained properly.
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer/
retailer first. Some electrical
equipment can damage the
vehicle and the damage would
not be covered by the vehicle's
warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other
components from working as
they should.
Because the vehicle has anti-lock
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
brake system. If you do, both brake
systems will not work well, or at all.
Trailer Wiring Harness
All of the electrical circuits required
for the trailer lighting system can be
accessed at a connector mounted to
the frame, behind the rear bumper
cover.
When TSC is applying the brakes,
the TCS/StabiliTrak indicator light
flashes to notify the driver to reduce
speed. See Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on
page 4‑25. If the trailer continues to
sway, StabiliTrak will reduce engine
torque to help slow the vehicle.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is
not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑40 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑41.
TSC will not function if StabiliTrak is
turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-60
Driving and Operating
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-1
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . 9-28
Park Brake and P (Park)
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Rear Compartment Fuse
Vehicle Care
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Accessories and
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . 9-29
Wheels and Tires
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . 9-53
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Tire Terminology and
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Bulb Replacement
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Different Size Tires and
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 9-12
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . 9-14
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . 9-22
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-2
Vehicle Care
Wheel Alignment and Tire
California Proposition
65 Warning
General Information
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit (Without Selector
Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76
Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit (With Selector
Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 9-100
For service and parts needs, visit
your dealer/retailer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:
Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-101
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-105
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-3
GM Accessories are designed to
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
Accessories and
Modifications
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize
the vehicle using genuine GM
Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM
Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM Accessories.
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained in
remote keyless transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer
accessories to the vehicle can affect
vehicle performance and safety,
including such things as airbags,
braking, stability, ride and handling,
emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems
like antilock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑41
.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from the installation or use
of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not
covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4
Vehicle Care
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
Vehicle Checks
WARNING (Continued)
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on
Doing Your Own
Service Work
.
Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts
can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
WARNING
{
page 12‑15
.
You can be injured and the
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Airbag System
Check on page 2‑42.
vehicle could be damaged if you
try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
.
Be sure you have sufficient
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Maintenance Records on
knowledge, experience,
the proper replacement
parts, and tools before
attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
page 10‑9
.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-5
Hood
To open the hood:
2. Move the secondary hood
release lever to the right to
release the striker. The lever is
located near the middle of
the hood.
1. Pull the release handle with the
above symbol on it. It is located
below the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all
the filler caps are on properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-6
Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.8 L V6 Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 9‑14
G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 9‑17.
.
B. Power Steering Reservoir and
Cap. See Power Steering Fluid
H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
on page 9‑22
.
See Jump Starting on
page 9‑101
.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 9‑10.
I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal
(Out of View). See Jump Starting
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
on page 9‑101
.
View). See Engine Oil on
page 9‑10
.
J. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 9‑45.
E. Brake Master Cylinder
Reservoir. See Brakes on
K. Windshield Washer Fluid
page 9‑24
.
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑23
.
F. Battery (Out of View). See
Battery on page 9‑27.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-8
Vehicle Care
3.0 L V6 Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
Engine Cover
9-9
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 9‑14
H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 9‑17.
.
Engine Cover (3.0 L V6)
B. Power Steering Reservoir and
Cap (Under engine cover). See
Power Steering Fluid on
I. Battery (Out of View). See
Battery on page 9‑27.
page 9‑22
.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 9‑10.
See Jump Starting on
page 9‑101
.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
K. Remote Negative (−) Terminal
(Out of View). See Jump Starting
View). See Engine Oil on
page 9‑10
.
on page 9‑101.
E. Engine Cover on page 9‑9.
L. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 9‑45.
F. Transmission Fluid Cap and
Dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on
M. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
To remove:
page 9‑13
.
page 9‑23.
1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).
G. Brake Master Cylinder
2. Raise the engine cover (B) to
release from the retainers.
Reservoir. See Brakes on
page 9‑24
.
3. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall engine cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-10
Vehicle Care
When to Add Engine Oil
Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick,
add at least one liter/quart of the
recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must
be on level ground.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6 for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
page 11‑2
.
The engine oil dipstick handle
is a yellow loop. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6 for the location of the
engine oil dipstick.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
If the engine has so much oil that
the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows
the proper operating range, the
engine could be damaged.
1. Turn off the engine and give the
oil several minutes to drain back
into the oil pan. If this is not
done, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
with a paper towel or cloth, then
push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-11
.
SAE 5W-30
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding
oil to maintain engine oil level, oil
meeting GM Standard GM4718M
might not be available. You can add
substitute oil designated SAE 5W-30
with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not
meeting GM Standard GM4718M
should not be used for an oil
change.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
SAE 5W-30 is best for the
vehicle. These numbers on an
oil container show its viscosity,
or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as
Look for three things:
.
GM4718M
This vehicle's engine requires a
special oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as
synthetic. However, not all
synthetic oils will meet this GM
standard. Use only an oil that
meets GM Standard GM4718M.
SAE 20W-50.
.
American Petroleum Institute
(API) starburst symbol
Engine Oil Additives / Engine
Oil Flushes
Notice: Using oils that do not
have the GM4718M Standard
designation can cause engine
damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Do not add anything to the oil. The
recommended oils with the starburst
symbol that meet GM standards are
all that is needed for good
Oils meeting these requirements
should have the starburst
performance and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
symbol on the container. This
symbol indicates that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
This vehicle's engine was filled at
the factory with a Mobil 1® synthetic
oil meeting all requirements for this
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-12
Vehicle Care
if driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system might not indicate
that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, the engine oil
and filter must be changed at least
once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your dealer/
retailer has trained service people
who will perform this work using
genuine parts and reset the system.
It is also important to check the oil
regularly and keep it at the proper
level.
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
engine oil change. To reset the
system:
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably. For
the oil life system to work properly,
the system must be reset every time
the oil is changed.
1. Using the DIC MENU button
and thumbwheel on the turn
signal lever, display “Oil Life
Remaining” on the DIC. See
Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 4‑29 and Engine Oil
Messages on page 4‑36.
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished, it
indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A “Change Engine Oil
Soon” message comes on. See
Engine Oil Messages on
page 4‑36. Change the oil as soon
as possible within the next 1 000 km
(600 miles). It is possible that,
2. Press the SET button to reset
the oil life at 100%.
Be careful not to reset the oil
life display accidentally at any
time other than after the oil is
changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil
change.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-13
The oil life system can also be reset
as follows:
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the
trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of
water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
There is a special procedure for
checking and changing the
transmission fluid. Because this
procedure is difficult, you should
have this done at your dealer/
retailer service department. Contact
your dealer/retailer for additional
information or the procedure can be
found in the service manual. To
purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 12‑15.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the
accelerator pedal three times
within five seconds.
If the “Change Engine Oil Soon”
message is not on, the system is
reset.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
The system is reset when the
“Change Engine Oil Soon” message
is off.
Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Scheduled
Maintenance on page 10‑2, and be
sure to use the fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
What to Do with Used Oil
It is not necessary to check
the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer service department
and have it repaired as soon as
possible.
Used engine oil contains elements
that can be unhealthy for your skin
and could even cause cancer. Do
not let used oil stay on your skin.
Clean your skin and nails with soap
and water, or a good hand cleaner.
Wash or properly dispose of clothing
or rags. See the manufacturer's
warnings about the use and
Lubricants on page 10‑6.
disposal of oil products.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-14
Vehicle Care
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6 for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required. Never use compressed
air to clean the filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
Maintenance II intervals and replace
it at the first oil change after each
80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 10‑2 for more information.
If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil
change.
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
A. Air Duct Clamp
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
B. Electrical Connectors
C. Retaining Clips
page 9‑5
.
2. Locate the air filter housing on
the front of the passenger side
of the engine compartment. See
Engine Compartment Overview
3. Disconnect the outlet duct by
loosening the air duct clamp (A).
4. Disconnect the electrical
connectors (B).
on page 9‑6
.
5. Lift the retaining clips (C) on the
air filter housing.
6. Turn and tilt cover slightly
upwards and slide cover away
from outside edge of vehicle.
Remove the air filter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-15
8. Replace air cleaner cover by
inserting tabs appropriately into
slots. Lower cover to meet
bottom of box. Place clips on
retention features and clip
closed.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
Notice: Installing an air cleaner
different than the one
9. Retighten the air duct clamp.
recommended in Maintenance
Replacement Parts may cause
engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
10. Reconnect the electrical
connectors.
WARNING
{
A. Cover Cut Outs
B. Air Filter Tabs
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
7. To install the air filter, place filter
inside box where the pleats fit in
between the tabs located inside
the lower box. Ensure that the
cover cut outs (A) on both sides
match the air filter tabs (B) on
both sides.
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-16
Vehicle Care
Cooling System
When it is safe to lift the hood:
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
If the coolant inside the coolant
surge tank is boiling, do not do
anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a
level surface.
If there seems to be no leak, with
the engine on, check to see if
the electric engine cooling fan
is running. If the engine is
overheating, the fan should be
running. If it is not, your vehicle
needs service. Turn off the engine.
The coolant level should be
3.0 L V6 Engine shown, 2.8 L
V6 Engine similar
between the MIN and MAX lines.
If it is not, you may have a leak at
the radiator hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump, or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
A. Engine Cooling Fans
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-17
Notice: Using coolant other than
DEX-COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the
engine coolant could require
changing sooner, at 50 000 km
(30,000 miles) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
What to Use
drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
WARNING
{
Adding only plain water to the
cooling system can be
.
Gives freezing protection down
dangerous. Plain water, or some
other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle's coolant
warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the
engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up to
129°C (265°F), engine
temperature.
.
Protects against rust and
Engine Coolant
corrosion.
.
The cooling system in the vehicle is
filled with DEX-COOL® engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in the vehicle for five years
or 240 000 km (150,000 miles),
whichever occurs first.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
warning. The engine could catch
fire and you or others could be
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and
.
Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
DEX-COOL® coolant.
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 9‑20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-18
Vehicle Care
Checking Coolant
How to Add Coolant to the
Coolant Surge Tank
WARNING
{
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn
the coolant surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is hot.
Wait for the cooling system and
coolant surge tank pressure cap
to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until
it cools down. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the
indicated mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and
If no problem is found, check to
see if coolant is visible in the
coolant surge tank. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not
at the indicated level mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at
the coolant surge tank, but be sure
the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is
cool before you do it.
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before this is done.
See Engine Overheating on
page 9‑20 for more information.
The coolant surge tank is located in
the engine compartment on the
driver side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6 for more information on
location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-19
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Adding only plain water to the
cooling system can be
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
dangerous. Plain water, or some
other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle's coolant
warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the
engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat
3.0 L V6 Engine
1. Remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot.
warning. The engine could catch
fire and you or others could be
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant.
Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about
one-quarter of a turn. If you hear
a hiss, wait for that to stop. This
will allow any pressure still left to
be vented out the
Notice: In cold weather, water
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core and other
parts. Use the recommended
coolant and the proper coolant
mixture.
2.8 L V6 Engine
discharge hose.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-20
Vehicle Care
2. Then keep turning the pressure
cap slowly and remove it.
Check the level in the coolant surge
tank when the cooling system has
cooled down. If the coolant is not at
the proper level, repeat Steps 1
through 3 and reinstall the pressure
cap. If the coolant still is not at the
proper level when the system cools
down again, see your dealer/retailer.
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not,
do not continue to run the engine
and have the vehicle serviced.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
the proper DEX-COOL® coolant
mixture to the indicated
level mark.
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
warranty.
4. With the coolant surge tank
pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you
can feel the upper radiator hose
getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has an indicator to warn
of engine overheating.
Notice: If the engine catches fire
because of being driven with no
coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty.
There is an engine coolant
By this time, the coolant level
inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to
the coolant surge tank until the
level reaches the indicated
level mark.
temperature warning light on the
vehicle's instrument panel. See
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
on page 4‑17
.
You may decide not to lift the hood
when this warning appears, but
instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Service on
5. Then replace the pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure cap is
hand-tight.
page 12‑8
.
If you do decide to lift the hood,
make sure the vehicle is parked on
a level surface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-21
If the overheat warning displays with
no sign of steam:
If Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If No Steam Is Coming From
The Engine Compartment
1. Turn the air off.
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
WARNING
{
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it
off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off
the road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and let the
.
Climbing a long hill on a hot day.
.
Stopping after high-speed
driving.
.
Idling for long periods in traffic.
engine idle.
.
Towing a trailer.
If you keep driving when your
engine is overheated, the liquids
in it can catch fire. You or others
could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-22
Vehicle Care
If the temperature overheat gauge
is no longer in the overheat zone or
an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slow
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front
of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
How to Check Power Steering
Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the key off and let the
engine compartment cool down.
2. Remove the engine cover,
if required. See Engine Cover
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9‑6 for reservoir location.
on page 9‑9
.
If the warning continues, pull
over, stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
3. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
When to Check Power Steering
Fluid
4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
dipstick with a clean rag.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the
engine for three minutes while
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down.
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless a
leak is suspected in the system or
unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss
in this system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
5. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
6. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be within the HOT
mark. If necessary, add only enough
fluid to bring the level within
the mark.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-23
Notice:
What to Use
Adding Washer Fluid
.
When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer's instructions
for adding water.
To determine what kind of fluid to
use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑6. Always
use the proper fluid.
The WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
FLUID message appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC)
when the fluid level is low.
.
Do not mix water with
Washer Fluid
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
What to Use
When windshield washer fluid is
needed, be sure to read the
manufacturer's instructions before
use. If operating the vehicle in an
area where the temperature may fall
below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against
freezing.
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid
up to the fill mark. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for
fluid expansion if freezing
occurs, which could
page 9‑6 for reservoir location.
damage the tank if it is
completely full.
.
Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer
system and paint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-24
Vehicle Care
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
Brake Pedal Travel
Brakes
See your dealer/retailer if the brake
pedal does not return to normal
height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a
sign that brake service might be
required.
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
something is wrong with the brakes.
Brake Adjustment
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to torque
Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
WARNING
{
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake
wear warning sound is heard,
have the vehicle serviced.
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 11‑2.
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-25
There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
Replacing Brake System Parts
Brake Fluid
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
new, approved replacement parts.
If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front and
rear brakes — for the worse. The
braking performance expected can
change in many other ways if the
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
.
The brake fluid level goes down
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
indicated on the reservoir cap. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6 for the location of the
reservoir.
.
A fluid leak in the brake
hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the
brake hydraulic system fixed,
since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not
work well.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-26
Vehicle Care
Do not top off the brake fluid.
What to Add
Notice:
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much
fluid when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
.
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
from a sealed container. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑6.
Using the wrong fluid can
badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For
example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in the brake
hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.
WARNING
{
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic
system.
WARNING
{
.
If brake fluid is spilled on
the vehicle's painted
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
brake hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not
to spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.
When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4‑23.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
All-Wheel Drive
9-27
Vehicle Storage
Battery
Refer to the replacement number
shown on the original battery label
when a new battery is needed. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 9‑6 for battery location.
Transfer Case
WARNING
{
When to Check and Change
Lubricant
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 9‑101 for tips on working
around a battery without
The transfer case is filled with oil
during manufacture, which then
does not require changing. It is not
necessary to regularly check the
transfer case fluid unless there is a
leak suspected or an unusual noise
is heard. A fluid loss could indicate
a problem. It is recommended to
have the transfer case serviced at
your dealer/retailer by trained
service technicians.
DANGER
{
Battery posts, terminals, and
getting hurt.
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-28
Vehicle Care
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
Starter Switch Check
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
.
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
.
To check the P (Park)
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 8‑29
.
Contact your dealer/retailer if
service is required.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each
gear. The vehicle should start
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
If the vehicle starts in any other
position, contact your dealer/
retailer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-29
3. Remove the wiper blade.
Front Wiper Blade
Replacement
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear or cracking. See
Scheduled Maintenance on
4. Reverse steps 1 through 3 for
wiper blade replacement.
To replace the wiper blade
assembly:
Rear Wiper Blade Replacement
page 10‑2 for more information.
1. Pull the windshield wiper
assembly away from the
windshield.
The rear wiper blade and wiper arm
have a cover for protection. The
cover must be removed before the
wiper blade can be replaced.
It is a good idea to clean or replace
the wiper blade assembly on a
regular basis or when worn. For
proper windshield wiper blade
length and type, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 10‑8.
To remove the cover:
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade
arm to touch the windshield when
no wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not
allow the wiper blade arm to
touch the windshield.
2. Press the button in the middle of
the wiper arm connector, and
pull the wiper blade away from
the arm connector.
1. Slide a plastic tool under
cover and push upward to
unsnap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-30
Vehicle Care
2. Slide cover towards wiper blade
tip to unhook from blade
assembly.
To remove the wiper blade:
2. Push the release lever (B) to
disengage the hook and push
the wiper arm (A) out of the
blade assembly (C).
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the
windshield.
3. Remove the cover.
3. Push the new blade assembly
securely on the wiper arm until
the release lever clicks into
place.
4. After wiper blade replacement,
ensure that cover hook slides
into slot in blade assembly.
5. Snap cover down to secure.
4. Replace wiper cover.
A. Wiper Arm
B. Release Lever
C. Blade Assembly
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-31
.
.
.
The vehicle should be fully
The vehicle should be properly
prepared as follows:
Headlamp Aiming
The headlamp aiming system has
been preset at the factory.
assembled and all other work
stopped while headlamp aiming
is being performed.
.
The vehicle should be placed so
the headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft)
from a light colored wall.
The vehicle should be normally
loaded with a full tank of fuel and
one person or 75 kg (160 lbs)
sitting on the driver's seat.
If the vehicle is damaged in an
accident, the aim of the headlamps
can be affected and adjustment
could be necessary.
.
The vehicle must have all four
tires on a level surface which is
level all the way to the wall.
Tires should be properly inflated.
It is recommended that a dealer/
retailer adjust the headlamps. To
re-aim the headlamps yourself, use
the following procedure.
.
The vehicle should be placed so
Headlamp aiming is done with the
vehicle's low-beam headlamps.
The high-beam headlamps will be
correctly aimed if the low-beam
headlamps are aimed properly.
it is perpendicular to the wall or
other flat surface.
.
The vehicle should not have any
snow, ice, or mud on it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-32
Vehicle Care
To adjust the vertical aim:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 9‑5 for more information.
4. At the wall measure from the
ground upward (A) to the
recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
Up-level Vehicle
2. Locate the aim point at
the center inner projector
condensing lens of the low-beam
headlamp (not the outer lens).
Base Vehicle
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
on the wall the width of the
vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 4.
3. Measure the distance from the
ground to the aim dot on the
low‐beam headlamp. Record the
distance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-33
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp
to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the
headlamp.
For the vehicle that is equipped
with an up-level headlamp (HID),
there will be two vertical
headlamp aiming screws
(V1 and V2). The aiming screw
(V1) is adjusted from the engine
compartment side of the beauty
cover and the aiming screw (V2)
is adjusted through the access
hole in the beauty cover.
6. Turn on the low-beam
headlamps and place a piece of
cardboard or equivalent in front
of the headlamp not being
adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp
being adjusted to be seen on the
flat surface.
The aiming screw(s) can be
turned with a Phillips
screwdriver(s).
7. Locate the vertical headlamp
aiming screws, which are under
the hood near each headlamp
assembly.
For the vehicle that is equipped
with a base level lamp (halogen
bulb), there will be one vertical
headlamp aiming screw (V1).
The aiming screw (V1) is
adjusted from the engine
compartment side of the beauty
cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-34
Vehicle Care
8. For the base vehicle, turn the
vertical aiming screw (V1) until
the headlamp beam is aimed to
the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise
to raise or lower the angle of
the beam.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 9‑43
.
For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer/retailer.
For the up-level vehicle, turn the
vertical aiming screws (V1 and
V2) simultaneously until the
headlamp beam is aimed to the
horizontal tape line. Turn them
clockwise or counterclockwise to
raise or lower the angle of
the beam.
Halogen Bulbs
WARNING
{
9. Make sure that the light from the
headlamp is positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the
left (A) shows the correct
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.
headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect
headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for
the opposite headlamp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-35
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting
Headlamps
WARNING
{
The low beam high intensity
discharge lighting system
operates at a very high voltage.
If you try to service any of the
system components, you could be
seriously injured. Have your
dealer/retailer or a qualified
technician service them.
Base Headlamp Assembly
(Passenger side shown, Driver
side similar)
Base Headlamp Assembly
(Passenger side shown, Driver
side similar)
The up‐level vehicle has HID
headlamps. The park lamp function
is also a function of the HID
headlamp. After an HID headlamp
bulb has been replaced, the beam
might be a slightly different shade
than it was originally. This is normal.
A. Low‐Beam Headlamp/Daytime
Running Lamp (DRL)
A. Low‐Beam Headlamp/Daytime
B. High‐Beam Headlamp
Running Lamp (DRL)
C. Turn Signal Lamp
B. High‐Beam Headlamp
C. Turn Signal Lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-36
Vehicle Care
Driver Side
The removal of the underhood
electrical center is required for the
replacement of one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 9‑5
.
WARNING
{
Liquids from environment or
spillage and/or tools placed on
top of or used in the underhood
electrical center while the cover is
removed can pose a risk of
Up–Level Headlamp Assembly
(Driver side shown, Passenger
side similar)
Up–Level Headlamp Assembly
(Driver side shown, Passenger
side similar)
electrical shock/burn to anyone in
the vicinity. These conditions can
also cause damage to electrical
components on the vehicle. Keep
liquids and tools away from the
underhood electrical center when
the cover is removed.
A. High/Low‐Beam Headlamp
B. Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
C. Turn Signal Lamp
A. High/Low‐Beam Headlamp
B. Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
C. Turn Signal Lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-37
3. Remove the connector lock (B)
located at the bottom of the
sensor connector (C).
Passenger Side
The removal of the air filter/cleaner
assembly and base is required for
the replacement of one of these
bulbs:
4. Press on the top and bottom of
the sensor connectors (C) and
remove.
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
5. Lift the three retaining clips (D)
on the air filter housing.
page 9‑5
.
6. Turn and tilt cover slightly
upwards and slide cover away
from outside edge of vehicle.
Lift the cover away from base.
2. Unlatch three clips and lift up the
underhood electrical center
cover to remove.
A. Air Duct Clamp
B. Connector Lock
C. Sensor Connectors
D. Retaining Clips
7. Lift the air cleaner/filter base to
disengage from three pins.
2. Disconnect the outlet duct by
loosening the air duct clamp (A).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-38
Vehicle Care
6. Install the bulb socket in the
headlamp assembly.
Low-Beam Headlamps/Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL),
High-Beam Headlamps (Base)
7. Connect the electrical connector.
8. Install the cap with the down
arrow pointing down in the back
of the headlamp assembly.
9. For driver side, reinstall the
underhood electrical center
cover by latching three clips.
10. For passenger side, reinstall
the air filter/cleaner assembly
base by pushing to seat . Verify
the base is seated securely,
then install the engine air filter/
cleaner assembly.
2. Remove the bottom cap for the
high-beam headlamp bulb
replacement from the back of the
headlamp assembly.
1. Remove the top cap for the
low-beam headlamp/DRL bulb
replacement from the back of the
headlamp assembly.
3. Disconnect electrical connector.
High/Low‐Beam Headlamps
(Up-Level)
4. Remove the bulb socket from
the headlamp assembly.
The high/low beam headlamps on
the up-level are High Intensity
Discharge (HID) and should be
replaced at the dealer/retailer.
5. Replace the bulb in the bulb
socket.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-39
3. Remove the DRL bulb socket
from the headlamp assembly.
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
(Up-Level)
Front Turn Signal Lamp
(Base and Up-Level)
4. Replace the bulb in the bulb
socket.
To replace the Front Turn
Signal Lamp:
To replace the Front Turn
Signal Lamp:
5. Install the bulb socket in the
headlamp assembly.
1. Remove the turn signal lamp
bulb socket from the headlamp
assembly.
6. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Remove the turn signal lamp
bulb from the socket.
7. Install the cap with the down
arrow pointing down in the back
of the headlamp assembly.
3. Replace the bulb in the bulb
socket.
8. For driver side, reinstall the
underhood electrical center
cover by latching three clips.
4. Install the bulb socket in the
headlamp assembly.
9. For passenger side, reinstall the
air filter/cleaner assembly base
by pushing to seat. Verify the
base is seated securely, then
install the engine air filter/
cleaner assembly.
5. For driver side, reinstall the
underhood electrical center
cover by latching three clips.
1. Remove the bottom cap for the
DRL bulb replacement from the
back of the headlamp assembly.
6. For passenger side, reinstall the
air filter/cleaner assembly base
by pushing to seat . Verify the
base is seated securely, then
install the engine air filter/
cleaner assembly.
2. Disconnect electrical connector.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-40
Vehicle Care
Turn Signal Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Manual) on page 1‑13 or
Liftgate (Power) on page 1‑14.
A. Turn Signal Lamp
4. Remove the two screws from the
taillamp assembly.
B. Back-Up Bulb/Socket
5. Pull the taillamp assembly
straight back to remove.
6. Turn the turn signal lamp (A)
bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove it from the taillamp
assembly.
A. Push Pin
7. Pull the bulb straight out from
the socket.
B. Taillamp Cover
2. Pull on push pin (A) to release
the taillamp cover (B).
3. Remove the taillamp cover from
the lamp assembly by pulling
rearward from the top to
unfasten from snap tabs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-41
8. Press a new bulb into the
socket, insert it into the taillamp
assembly and turn the bulb
socket clockwise until it clicks.
Back-Up Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Manual) on page 1‑13 or
9. Reinstall the taillamp assembly
and tighten the screws.
Liftgate (Power) on page 1‑14.
10. Reinstall the taillamp cover by
snapping it into place.
11. Push the push pin to secure
the taillamp cover.
4. Remove the two screws from the
taillamp assembly.
5. Pull the taillamp assembly
straight back to remove.
A. Push Pin
B. Taillamp Cover
2. Pull on push pin (A) to release
the taillamp cover (B).
3. Remove the taillamp cover from
the lamp assembly by pulling
rearward from the top to
unfasten from snap tabs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-42
Vehicle Care
7. Turn the back–up bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Manual) on page 1‑13 or
Liftgate (Power) on page 1‑14
for more information.
8. Press a new bulb/socket into the
taillamp assembly and turn the
bulb/socket clockwise until it
clicks.
9. Reinstall the taillamp assembly
and tighten the screws.
10. Reinstall the taillamp cover by
snapping it into place.
A. Turn Signal Lamp
11. Push the push pin to secure
the taillamp cover.
B. Back–Up Bulb/Socket
6. Disconnect the wire harness
from the back–up bulb/
socket (B).
Passenger side shown, driver side
similar
2. Push the left end of the lamp
assembly towards the right.
3. Turn the lamp assembly down to
remove from liftgate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-43
5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of
the bulb socket.
Replacement Bulbs
Bulb
Number
6. Push the replacement bulb
straight into the bulb socket and
turn the bulb socket clockwise to
install into lamp assembly.
Exterior Lamp
Hyperclick
16W
Back-Up Lamp
7. Turn the lamp assembly into the
liftgate engaging the clip side
first.
Daytime
Running Lamp
W21/5W
9005
Headlamp
High-Beam
8. Push on the lamp side opposite
the clip until the lamp assembly
snaps into place.
Headlamp
Low-Beam
A. Bulb Socket
B. Bulb
H11
License Plate Lamp
Turn Signal Front
W5W
C. Lamp Assembly
WY21W
4. Turn the bulb socket (A)
counterclockwise to remove from
lamp assembly (C).
Tail/Turn
Signal Rear
W21W
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer/retailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-44
Vehicle Care
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by
electrical problems.
Electrical System
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have the
headlamp wiring checked right away
if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
Electrical System
Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
Windshield Wipers
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed. This
greatly reduces the chance of circuit
overload and fire caused by
To check a fuse, look at the
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice, may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the
windshield wipers.
electrical problems.
Fuses of the same amperage can
be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
you can.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
the following in the vehicle:
.
Headlamp Wiring
.
Windshield Wiper Motor
To identify and check fuses, circuit
breakers, and relays, see Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 9‑45 and Rear Compartment
Fuse Block on page 9‑49.
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
.
Power Windows and other
Power Accessories
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-45
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
To remove the fuse block cover,
press the clips on the cover and lift
it straight up.
The vehicle might not have all the
fuses and features listed.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical components on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Usage J-Case
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
6
Wiper
Rear Electrical
Center 1
25
12
Vacuum Pump
Rear Electrical
Center 2
Anitlock Brake
System Pump
26
27
24
Not Used
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-46
Vehicle Care
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
Heater Motor
Post–Catalytic
Converter O2
Sensor
23
30
41
Cooling Fan 2
Starter
7
Switch Back Light
42
Battery Sense
(Regulated Voltage
Control)
Pre–Catalytic
Converter O2
Sensor
43
Not Used
32
8
9
44
Not Used
Adaptive Forward
Lighting / Adaptive
Headlamp Leveling
Module
45
Cooling Fan 1
Engine Control
Module Powertrain
33
Secondary
AIR Pump
59
10
11
13
Fuel Injectors–Even
Fuel Injectors–Odd
Washer
Body Control
Module 7
34
35
46
47
Mini Fuses
Usage
Engine Control
Module Battery
Electronic Brake
Control Module
1
Instrument Panel
Cluster/Malfunction
Indicator Lamp/
Ignition
16
Transmission
Control Module
Battery
Low Beam
Headlamp‐Right
2
17
18
Air Quality Sensor
Headlamp Washer
Low Beam
Headlamp‐Left
Mass Air Flow
Sensor
3
4
5
50
51
Front Fog Lamps
Horn
Transmission
Control Module Run
Crank
Not Used
19
Engine Control
Module Run Crank
Fuel System Control
Module
52
Rear Electrical
Center Run Crank
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-47
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
Micro
Usage
Relays
53
Headlamp Level
68
69
70
71
72
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
2
4
Vacuum Pump
Wiper Control
Wiper Speed
Starter
Sensing Diagnostic
Module Ignition
54
55
56
57
65
High Beam
Headlamp–Right
5
10
12
14
High Beam
Headlamp–Left
Cool Fan 3
Mini Relays
Usage
Low Beam/HID
Ignition Steering
Column Lock
7
9
Powertrain
U Micro
Relays
Usage
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
Run/Crank
Trailer Right
Stop Lamp
13
15
8
Headlamp Washer
Trailer Left
Stop Lamp
66
67
Secondary
AIR Pump
16
Spare
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-48
Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
Mini Fuses
DISPLY
Usage
Display
The instrument panel fuse block is
located in the center console
between the driver and passenger
seats. To access the fuses, open
the fuse panel door from the
S/ROOF
SPARE
Sun Roof
Spare
Universal
Handsfree Phone
UHP
RDO
passenger side by pulling it out.
Radio
To reinstall the door, push the door
back into its original location.
Auxiliary Power
Outlet ‐ Instrument
Panel
APO ‐ IP
Auxiliary Power
APO ‐ CNSL Outlet ‐ Floor
Console
Body Control
BCM 3
Module 3
Body Control
BCM 4
Module 4
Body Control
BCM 5
Module 5
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
ONSTAR
OnStar® System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-49
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
RAIN SNSR Rain Sensor
Body Control
Module 2
BCM 2
Body Control
BCM 6
Module 6
AMP/RDO Amplifier/Radio
Electronic Steering
Column Lock
Heating Ventilation
HVAC
ESCL
AIRBAG
DLC
& Air Conditioning
Sensing and
Diagnostic Module
J—Case
Usage
Fuses
Data Link
Connection
Body Control
Module 8
BCM 8
Instrument Panel
Cluster
IPC
FRT BLWR Front Blower
SPARE
BCM 1
Not Used
The rear compartment fuse block is
located in the cargo area, on the
driver side of the vehicle behind the
lower trim panel. To open, turn the
latch with a flat bladed tool and pull
the trim panel from the edges to fold
it down.
Relays Usage
Body Control
Module 1
LOGIC RLY Logistics Relay
Retained
RAP/
Accessory Power/
ACCY RLY
Accessory Relay
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses and relays
shown.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-50
Vehicle Care
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Security
SPARE
FUSES
* SEC
Spare Fuses
INFOTMNT Infotainment
* TRLR EXP Trailer Export
WPR REAR Rear Wiper
Automatic Occupant
Sensing Module
AOS MDL
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
MIR
Mirror Window
WDO MDL Module
* SPARE
Not Used
PASS DR Passenger Door
WDO SW Window Switch
CNSTR
VENT
Canister Vent
DRV
LGM
LOGIC
Lift Gate Module
Logic
Driver Power Seat
PWR SEAT
PASS DR Passenge/Driver
PWR SEAT Power Seats
CAMERA Rear Vision Camera
FRT Front Ventilated
VENT SEAT Seats
MDL TRLR Trailer Module
Rear Parking Assist
TRLR MDL Trailer Module
RPA MDL
Module
Semi Active
SADS MDL Damping System
Module
RDM
Rear Drive Module
PRK
LPS TRLR
Rear Compartment Fuse Block
Trailer Park Lamps
RR
Rear Heated Seats
HTD SEAT
FUEL
PUMP
Fuel Pump
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-51
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
SPARE
LT WDO
Usage
Not Used
Relays
Usage
FRT
HTD SEAT
SPARE
Not Used
Front Heated Seats
Left Window
* FUEL
PUMP
Fuel Pump
THEFT
HORN
IGN/
THEFT 1
Theft Horn
Liftgate
Ignition/Theft 1
WPR
CONTRL
Wiper Control
* LGATE
LGATE
MDL
Liftgate Module
REAR
DEFOG
* RUN RLY Run Relay
Rear Defog
IGN/
THEFT 2
LOGIC
Logistic Relay
Ignition/Theft 2
Not Used
* BCM
THEFT
Body Control
Module Theft
DEFOG
REAR
Rear Window
Defogger
SPARE
* TRLR 2 Trailer 2
Universal Garage
Door Opener
HTD MIR Heated Mirror
*‐Denotes up‐level content.
Auxiliary Power
AUX PWR
UGDO
Outlet
RT WDO Right Window
PRK
Park Brake Module
BRK MDL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-52
Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
Tires
.
Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured
or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure.
Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer. If you
ever have questions about your
tire warranty and where to
obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details. For
additional information refer to
the tire manufacturer.
.
Overloading your tires can
cause overheating as a result
of too much flexing. You
could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑11.
.
Worn, old tires can cause
accidents. If your tread is
badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged,
replace them.
.
Underinflated tires pose the
same danger as overloaded
tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
See Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation on page 9‑60 for
inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed driving.
should be checked when your
tires are cold. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑59.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-53
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this (TIN). The TIN shows the
section for more detail.
Tire Identification Number
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is
molded into its sidewall. The
examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a
compact spare tire sidewall.
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
(C) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
manufacturers are required to
grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with
the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a
combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
Grading on page 9‑71
.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
(D) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-54
Vehicle Care
regular road tire has lost air
and gone flat. If your vehicle
has a compact spare tire,
see Compact Spare Tire on
page 9‑100 and If a Tire Goes
(E) Tire Inflation: The
temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to
420 kPa (60 psi). For more
information on tire pressure and
inflation see Tire Pressure on
Flat on page 9‑74
.
page 9‑59
.
(C) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the
Tire Identification Number
(F) Tire Size: A combination of
letters and numbers define a
tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
(B) Temporary Use Only: The
compact spare tire or temporary
use tire has a tread life of
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
approximately 5 000 km
(3,000 miles) and should not be
driven at speeds over 105 km/h
(65 mph). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-55
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
Tire Designations
Tire Size
(F) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carry capacity a tire is
certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
sidewall to sidewall.
The following illustration shows
an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
number that indicates the tire
height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to
(D) Construction Code: A
letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias
ply construction; and the letter B
means belted‐bias ply
standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
construction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-56
Vehicle Care
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between
the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
and coolant, but without
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is
passengers and cargo.
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
DOT Markings: A code molded
into the sidewall of a tire
expressed in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal).
signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
Accessory Weight: This
means the combined weight of
optional accessories. Some
examples of optional
accessories are, automatic
transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at
alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal)
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑59
.
on page 8‑11
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-57
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the front axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
page 8‑11
.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the rear axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
Maximum Load Rating: The
load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
page 8‑11
.
Intended Outboard Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
A tire used on passenger cars
and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑59 and
Vehicle Load Limits on
Load Limits on page 8‑11
.
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Occupant Distribution:
Designated seating positions.
page 8‑11
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-58
Vehicle Care
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the
tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm
(1/16 inch) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New
Vehicle Capacity Weight:
The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 8‑11
.
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Tires on page 9‑68
.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards): A tire
information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a
tire's traction, temperature,
and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle's
capacity weight and the original
equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure.
See “Tire and Loading
alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Information Label” under Vehicle
page 9‑71
.
Load Limits on page 8‑11
.
Tread: The portion of a tire
that comes into contact with
the road.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-59
If your tires have too much air
(over‐inflation), you can get
the following:
For additional information
regarding how much weight your
vehicle can carry, and an
Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of
air pressure to operate
effectively.
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 8‑11. How
you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle
with more weight than it was
designed to carry.
.
Unusual wear
.
Poor handling
Notice: Do not let anyone tell
you that under‐inflation or
over‐inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have
enough air (under‐inflation),
you can get the following:
.
Rough ride
.
Needless damage from
road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to your vehicle. This
label shows your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the
label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support
your vehicle's maximum load
carrying capacity.
.
Too much flexing
.
Too much heat
.
Tire overloading
.
Premature or
irregular wear
.
Poor handling
.
Reduced fuel economy
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-60
Vehicle Care
When to Check
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
Tire Pressure for
High-Speed Operation
Check your tires once a month
or more. Do not forget to check
the compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one. The compact
spare should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional
information regarding the
compact spare tire, see
WARNING
{
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
(100 mph) or higher, puts an
additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving
causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you
or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require
inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When
speed limits and road conditions
are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure
the tires are rated for high speed
operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the
Compact Spare Tire on
page 9‑100
.
How to Check
If you overfill the tire, release air
by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the tire valve.
Re‐check the tire pressure with
the tire gauge.
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure.
You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they are under‐inflated. Check
the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Be sure to put the valve caps
back on the valve stems. They
help prevent leaks by keeping
out dirt and moisture.
vehicle load.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-61
Vehicles with P235/65R18, P235/
55R20, or 235/55R20 size tires
require inflation pressure adjustment
when driving your vehicle at speeds
of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher.
Set the cold inflation pressure to the
maximum inflation pressure shown
on the tire sidewall, or 44 psi
(300 kPa), whichever is lower. When
you end this high-speed driving,
return the tires to the cold tire
inflation pressure shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑11
and Tire Pressure on page 9‑59.
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly
under‐inflated.
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your vehicle's
tires and transmit tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the
vehicle.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.
Each tire, including the spare
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
You will find the maximum load and
inflation pressure molded on the
tire's sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something
like this: Maximum load
690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)
Max. Press.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-62
Vehicle Care
Please note that the TPMS is
not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 12‑19 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry
Canada.
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire
and wheel assembly. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in
the vehicle's tires and transmit the
tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 9‑62 for
additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-63
DIC operation and displays see
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 9‑66, Tire Rotation on
page 9‑66 and Tires on page 9‑52.
page 4‑29
.
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This
could be an early indicator that the
air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
Notice: Using non‐approved tire
sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage
caused by using an incorrect tire
sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use
the GM approved tire sealant
available through your dealer/
retailer.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument panel
cluster. If the warning light comes
on, stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires to the recommended
pressure shown on the tire loading
information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 8‑11.
A Tire and Loading Information
label, attached to your vehicle,
shows the size of your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle's tires when they are cold.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 8‑11, for an example of the
Tire and Loading Information label
and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Tire Pressure on
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits
use a GM approved liquid tire
sealant. Using non-approved tire
sealants could damage the TPMS
sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit (Without Selector
Switch) on page 9‑76 or Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit (With
Selector Switch) on page 9‑84 for
information regarding the inflator kit
materials and instructions.
At the same time a message to
check the pressure appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC)
display. The low tire pressure
warning light and the DIC warning
message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to
the correct inflation pressure. Using
the DIC, tire pressure levels can be
viewed by the driver. For additional
information and details about the
page 9‑59
.
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you
about a low tire pressure condition
but it does not replace normal tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-64
Vehicle Care
.
.
The TPMS sensor matching
process was started but not
completed or not completed
successfully after rotating the
vehicle's tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light
should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is
performed successfully. See
“TPMS Sensor Matching
Replacement tires or wheels do
not match your vehicle's original
equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those
recommended for your vehicle
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 9‑68.
TPMS Malfunction Light and
Message
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
about one minute and then stays on
for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. A DIC warning message is
also displayed. The low tire warning
light and DIC warning message
come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of
the conditions that can cause the
malfunction light and DIC message
to come on are:
.
Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
Process” later in this section.
.
One or more TPMS sensors are
missing or damaged. The DIC
message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off
when the TPMS sensors are
installed and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
If the TPMS is not functioning it
cannot detect or signal a low tire
condition. See your dealer/retailer
for service if the TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
.
One of the road tires has been
replaced with the spare tire. The
spare tire does not have a
TPMS sensor. The TPMS
malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you
re‐install the road tire containing
the TPMS sensor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-65
tire's air pressure, do not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure
indicated on the tire's sidewall.
The TPMS sensor matching process
is outlined below:
TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
1. Set the parking brake.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. Any time you
rotate your vehicle's tires or replace
one or more of the TPMS sensors,
the identification codes will need to
be matched to the new tire/wheel
position. The sensors are matched
to the tire/wheel positions in the
following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
To decrease air-pressure out of a
tire you can use the pointed end of
the valve cap, a pencil-style air
pressure gauge, or a key.
2. Place the vehicle power mode in
ON/RUN/START. See Ignition
Positions on page 8‑17.
3. Select the vehicle information
menu using the menu button.
You have two minutes to match the
first tire/wheel position, and
4. Select the tire pressure screen
using the up/down thumbwheel.
five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer
than two minutes, to match the first
tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire
and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to
start over.
5. Press SET to begin the sensor
matching process.
6. Press SET to confirm selection.
The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode
and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
message displays on the DIC
screen.
The TPMS sensors can also be
matched to each tire/wheel position
by increasing or decreasing the
tire's air pressure. If increasing the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-66
Vehicle Care
7. Start with the driver side
front tire.
11. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure
in Step 5. The horn sounds two
times to indicate the sensor
identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear
tire, and the TPMS sensor
Tire Inspection
We recommend that you
regularly inspect your vehicle's
tires, including the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, for signs
of wear or damage. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on
8. Remove the valve cap from the
valve cap stem. Activate the
TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure
for five seconds, or until a horn
chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to
matching process is no longer
active. The TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
page 9‑68 for more information.
30 seconds to sound, confirms
that the sensor identification
code has been matched to this
tire and wheel position.
Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
8 000 to 13 000 km (5,000 to
8,000 miles). See Scheduled
12. Press STOP to turn the
ignition off.
9. Proceed to the passenger side
front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
13. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Maintenance on page 10‑2
.
The purpose of a regular tire
rotation is to achieve a uniform
wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle
continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.
10. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire, and repeat the
14. Put the valve caps back on the
valve stems.
procedure in Step 5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-67
Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon as
possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 9‑68 and Wheel
After the tires have been
WARNING
{
rotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Tire Pressure on
page 9‑59 and Vehicle Load
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
Limits on page 8‑11
.
Replacement on page 9‑73
.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 9‑62
.
Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See
“Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on
on page 9‑74
.
page 11‑2
.
When rotating the vehicle's tires,
always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact
spare tire in the tire rotation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-68
Vehicle Care
The vehicle needs new tires if any
of the following statements are true:
wear out before they degrade due to
age. If you are unsure about the
need to replace the tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer
for more information.
When It Is Time for New
Tires
.
You can see the indicators at
Various factors, such as
three or more places around
the tire.
maintenance, temperatures, driving
speeds, vehicle loading, and road
conditions influence when you need
new tires.
.
You can see cord or fabric
Buying New Tires
showing through the tire's
rubber.
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for your vehicle.
The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle,
.
The tread or sidewall is cracked,
cut, or snagged deep enough to
show cord or fabric.
when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria
.
The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
.
The tire has a puncture, cut,
Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires
with the same TPC Spec rating.
This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the
original tires.
or other damage that cannot be
repaired well because of the size
or location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over
time. This is also true for the spare
tire, if the vehicle has one, even
if it is not being used. Multiple
conditions affect how fast this aging
takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation
pressure maintenance. With proper
care and maintenance tires typically
One way to tell when it is time for
new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which appear when the
tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or
less of tread remaining.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-69
GM's exclusive TPC Spec
See Tire Inspection on page 9‑66
and Tire Rotation on page 9‑66
for information on proper tire
rotation.
WARNING
{
system considers over a dozen
critical specifications that impact
the overall performance of your
vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire
If you use bias-ply tires on the
vehicle, the wheel rim flanges
could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail
suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
WARNING
{
Mixing tires could cause you
to lose control while driving.
If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have
a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to your
vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type
of tires on all wheels. It is all
right to drive with your
pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's
sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all‐season tread
design, the TPC Spec number
will be followed by an MS for
mud and snow. See Tire
If you must replace your
vehicle's tires with those that do
not have a TPC Spec number,
make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and
bias‐belted tires) as your
Sidewall Labeling on page 9‑53
for additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires
in sets of four. This is because
uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle
performing most like it did when
the tires were new. Replacing
less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle.
vehicle's original tires.
compact spare temporarily, as
it was developed for use on
your vehicle. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 9‑100
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-70
Vehicle Care
Vehicles that have a tire
pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
Different Size Tires and
Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a
different size than your original
equipment wheels and tires, this
could affect the way your vehicle
performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as anti‐lock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and electronic stability
control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
WARNING
{
If you add different sized wheels,
your vehicle may not provide an
acceptable level of performance
and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and
suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems
developed for your vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
low‐pressure warning if non‐TPC
Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non‐TPC
Spec rated tires may give a
low‐pressure warning that is
higher or lower than the proper
warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on
page 9‑61
.
Your vehicle's original
equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information
Label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 8‑11, for more
See Buying New Tires on
page 9‑68 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 9‑3 for
additional information.
information about the Tire and
Loading Information Label and
its location on your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-71
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver, or temporary
use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production
tires.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test
course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and
differences in road
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they
must also conform to federal
safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires by
treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This
applies only to vehicles sold in
the United States. The grades
are molded on the sidewalls of
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
All Passenger Car Tires Must
Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
characteristics and climate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-72
Vehicle Care
Traction – AA, A, B, C
Temperature – A, B, C
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
The temperature grades are
A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
passenger car tires must meet
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-73
Wheel Alignment and Tire Wheel Replacement
WARNING
{
Balance
The tires and wheels on the vehicle
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air
and make you lose control. You
could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
were aligned and balanced carefully
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
at the factory to give the longest tire
wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it
(except some aluminum wheels,
life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and
tire balancing will not be necessary
which can sometimes be repaired).
on a regular basis. However, if there
See your dealer/retailer if any of
these conditions exist.
is unusual tire wear or the vehicle
pulls to one side or the other, the
alignment should be checked. If the
vehicle vibrates when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See
your dealer/retailer for proper
diagnosis.
Your dealer/retailer will know the
kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the one it
replaces.
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration,
If you need to replace any of the
wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,
or Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) sensors, replace them only
with new GM original equipment
parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for
the vehicle.
headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire
or tire chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 9‑74 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-74
Vehicle Care
Used Replacement Wheels
If a Tire Goes Flat
WARNING (Continued)
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while you are driving, especially if
you maintain your vehicle's tires
properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a
WARNING
{
The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Putting a used wheel on the
vehicle is dangerous. You cannot
know how it has been used or
how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause a
crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions. To
help avoid damage to the vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove
the device if it is contacting the
vehicle, and do not spin the
vehicle's wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop well out of the
traffic lane.
Tire Chains
WARNING
{
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension or other vehicle parts.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any
rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the
vehicle under control by steering
the way you want the vehicle to go.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-75
It may be very bumpy and noisy, but
you can still steer. Gently brake to a
stop, well off the road if possible.
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
Changing a tire can be
To be certain the vehicle will not
move, put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from
the one being changed. That
would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
dangerous. The vehicle can slip
off the jack and roll over or fall on
you or other people. You and they
could be badly injured or even
killed. Find a level place to
WARNING
{
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs is
dangerous without the
change your tire. To help prevent
the vehicle from moving:
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
This vehicle may come with a jack
and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. To use the jacking
equipment to change a spare tire
safely, follow the instructions below.
Then see Tire Changing on
page 9‑93. To use the tire sealant
and compressor kit, see Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit
(Without Selector Switch) on
page 9‑76 or Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit (With Selector
Switch) on page 9‑84.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic
transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse).
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
Warning Flashers on page 5‑5.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-76
Vehicle Care
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit (Without
Selector Switch)
System Identification
If the vehicle has the tire sealant
and compressor kit shown above,
follow the operating instructions
under "Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit (With Selector
Switch).”
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
If the vehicle has the tire sealant
and compressor kit shown above,
see the operating instructions that
follow.
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-77
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not
be a place to store a tire.
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
Over-inflating a tire could cause
the tire to rupture and you or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the tire sealant
and compressor kit instructions
and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not
exceed the recommended
pressure.
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑22.
The tire sealant and compressor
can be used to temporarily seal
punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in
the tread area of the tire. It can also
be used to inflate an under
inflated tire.
If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire
sealant and compressor kit to be
effective. See Roadside Service on
WARNING
{
Storing the tire sealant and
compressor kit or other
page 12‑8
.
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
Read and follow all of the tire
sealant and compressor kit
instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-78
Vehicle Care
The kit includes:
Tire Sealant
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit to Temporarily
Seal and Inflate a
Read and follow the safe handling
instructions on the label adhered to
the sealant canister.
Punctured Tire
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister.
The sealant canister should be
replaced before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer/
retailer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister”
following.
A. Air Compressor
There is only enough sealant to seal
one tire. After usage, the sealant
canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
B. Tire Sealant Canister
C. Power Plug
When using the tire sealant and
compressor kit during cold
temperatures, warm the kit in a
heated environment for 5 minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire
faster.
D. On/Off Button
E. Pressure Gauge
F. Air Only Hose (Black)
G. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-79
Always do a safety check first. See
If a Tire Goes Flat on page 9‑74.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (G)
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it
clockwise until it is tight.
8. Press the on/off (D) button to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
6. Plug the power plug (C) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on
The compressor will inject
sealant and air into the tire.
The pressure gauge (E) will
initially show a high pressure
while the compressor pushes the
sealant into the tire. Once the
sealant is completely dispersed
into the tire, the pressure will
quickly drop and start to rise
again as the tire inflates with
air only.
page 9‑93
.
Make sure the on/off button (D)
is in the off (O) position.
page 4‑12
.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G)
and the power plug (C).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from
the flat tire by turning it
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
counterclockwise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-80
Vehicle Care
9. Inflate the tire to the
Notice: If the recommended
pressure cannot be reached after
approximately 25 minutes, the
vehicle should not be driven
farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the inflating hose from
the tire valve. See Roadside
Service on page 12‑8.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
usage.
recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gauge (E).
The recommended inflation
pressure can be found on the
Tire and Loading Information
label. See Tire Pressure on
11. Unplug the power plug (C) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
page 9‑59
.
12. Turn the sealant/air hose (G)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the tire valve stem.
The pressure gauge (E) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor is
on. Turn the compressor off to
get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may
be turned on/off until the correct
pressure is reached.
13. Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
10. Press the on/off button (D) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
14. Replace the sealant/air
hose (G), and the power
plug (C) back in their original
location.
The tire is not sealed and will
continue to leak air until the
vehicle is driven and the
sealant is distributed in the tire,
therefore, Steps 11 through
17 must be done immediately
after Step 10.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-81
18. Stop at a safe location and
check the tire pressure. Refer
to Steps 1 through 11 under
“Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
19. Wipe off any sealant from the
wheel, tire or vehicle.
20. Dispose of the used sealant
canister (B) and sealant/air
hose (G) assembly at a local
dealer/retailer or in accordance
with local state codes and
practices.
Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured).”
15. If the flat tire was able to inflate
to the recommended inflation
pressure, remove the
If the tire pressure has fallen
more than 10 psi (68 kPa)
below the recommended
inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire
sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Service on
21. Replace it with a new canister
available from your dealer/
retailer.
maximum speed label from the
sealant canister (B) and place
it in a highly visible location.
22. After temporarily sealing a tire
using the tire sealant and
The label is a reminder not to
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
the damaged tire is repaired or
replaced.
compressor kit, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer/
retailer within a 100 miles
(161 km) of driving to have the
tire repaired or replaced.
page 12‑8
.
If the tire pressure has not
dropped more than 10 psi
(68 kPa) from the
16. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in the
vehicle.
recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
pressure.
17. Immediately drive the vehicle
5 miles (8 km) to distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-82
Vehicle Care
2. Unlock the air only hose (F) from
the sealant canister (B) by
pulling up on the lever.
8. Plug the power plug (C) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not
Punctured)
3. Pull the air only hose (F) from
the sealant canister (B).
To use the air compressor to inflate
a tire with air only and not sealant:
page 4‑12
.
4. Remove the power plug (C) from
the air compressor (A).
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
5. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
6. Remove the tire valve stem cap
by turning it counterclockwise.
9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
7. Attach the air only hose (F) onto
the tire valve stem and press the
lever down to secure it.
10. Press the on/off (D) button to
turn the compressor on.
Always do a safety check first. See
If a Tire Goes Flat on page 9‑74.
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 9‑93
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-83
11. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
13. Unplug the power plug (C) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
pressure using the pressure
gauge (E). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑59.
To remove the sealant canister:
14. Disconnect the air only
hose (F) from the tire valve
stem, by turning it
counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
The pressure gauge (E) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate reading. The
compressor may be turned
on/off until the correct pressure
is reached.
15. Replace the air only hose (F)
and the power plug (C) back in
its original location.
1. Unlock the air only hose (F) from
the sealant canister (B) by
pulling up on the lever.
16. Place the equipment in the
original storage location in the
vehicle.
2. Pull the air only hose (F) from
the sealant canister (B).
12. Press the on/off button (D) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G)
from the compressor (A).
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
usage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-84
Vehicle Care
To install a new sealant canister:
Tire Sealant and
1. Align the sealant/air hose (G)
with the slot in the air
compressor.
Compressor Kit (With
Selector Switch)
System Identification
2. Push the sealant canister (B)
down and turn it clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (G)
around the air compressor
channel to stow it in its original
location.
4. Push the air compressor inflator
hose (F) onto the sealant
canister inlet and push the
lever down.
4. Turn the sealant canister (B) so
the inflator filling hose is aligned
with the slot in the compressor.
5. Lift the sealant canister (B) from
the compressor and replace with
a new sealant canister. See your
dealer/retailer for more
If the vehicle has the tire sealant
and compressor kit shown above,
see the operating instructions that
follow.
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-85
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
Over-inflating a tire could cause
the tire to rupture and you or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the tire sealant
and compressor kit instructions
and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not
exceed the recommended
pressure.
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8‑22.
If the vehicle has the tire sealant
and compressor kit shown above,
follow the operating instructions
under “Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit (Without Selector Switch).
WARNING
{
Storing the tire sealant and
compressor kit or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-86
Vehicle Care
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not
be a place to store a tire.
The kit includes:
A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or
Air Only)
B. On/Off Button
C. Pressure Gauge
D. Pressure Deflation Button
(If equipped)
The tire sealant and compressor
can be used to temporarily seal
punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in
the tread area of the tire. It can also
be used to inflate an under
inflated tire.
E. Tire Sealant Canister
F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
G. Air Only Hose (Black)
H. Power Plug
If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire
sealant and compressor kit to be
effective. See Roadside Service on
page 12‑8
.
Read and follow all of the tire
sealant and compressor kit
instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-87
When using the tire sealant and
compressor kit during cold
temperatures, warm the kit in a
heated environment for 5 minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire
faster.
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling
instructions on the label adhered to
the sealant canister.
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister. The
sealant canister should be replaced
before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer/
retailer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister”
following.
Always do a safety check first. See
If a Tire Goes Flat on page 9‑74
Do not remove any objects that
have penetrated the tire.
.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
There is only enough sealant to seal
one tire. After usage, the sealant
canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
page 9‑93
.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)
and the power plug (H).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit to Temporarily
Seal and Inflate a
4. Remove the valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
Punctured Tire
Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-88
Vehicle Care
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it
clockwise until it is tight.
The compressor will inject
sealant and air into the tire.
Notice: If the recommended
pressure cannot be reached after
approximately 25 minutes, the
vehicle should not be driven
farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the inflating hose from
the tire valve. See Roadside
Service on page 12‑8.
The pressure gauge (C) will
initially show a high pressure
while the compressor pushes the
sealant into the tire. Once the
sealant is completely dispersed
into the tire, the pressure will
quickly drop and start to rise
again as the tire inflates with
air only.
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on
page 4‑12
.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
11. Press the on/off button (B) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
pressure using the pressure
gauge (C). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑59.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
The tire is not sealed and will
continue to leak air until the
vehicle is driven and the
sealant is distributed in the tire,
therefore, Steps 12 through
18 must be done immediately
after Step 11.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
The pressure gauge (C) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may
be turned on/off until the
8. Turn the selector switch (A)
counterclockwise to the
Sealant + Air position.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
usage.
9. Press the on/off (B) button to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on.
correct pressure is reached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-89
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
the damaged tire is repaired or
replaced.
If the tire pressure has
not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the
recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire to
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the tire valve stem.
17. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in the
vehicle.
the recommended inflation
pressure.
14. Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle
5 miles (8 km) to distribute the
sealant in the tire.
20. Wipe off any sealant from the
wheel, tire, and vehicle.
15. Replace the sealant/air
hose (F), and the power
plug (H) back in their original
location.
21. Dispose of the used sealant
canister (E) and sealant/air
hose (F) assembly at a local
dealer/retailer or in accordance
with local state codes and
practices.
19. Stop at a safe location and
check the tire pressure. Refer
to Steps 1 through 11 under
“Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured).”
22. Replace it with a new canister
available from your dealer/
retailer.
If the tire pressure has fallen
more than 10 psi (68 kPa)
below the recommended
inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire
sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Service on
23. After temporarily sealing a tire
using the tire sealant and
16. If the flat tire was able to inflate
to the recommended inflation
pressure, remove the
compressor kit, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer/
retailer within a 100 miles
(161 km) of driving to have the
tire repaired or replaced.
maximum speed label from the
sealant canister (E) and place
it in a highly visible location.
The label is a reminder not to
page 12‑8
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-90
Vehicle Care
Always do a safety check first. See
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not
Punctured)
If a Tire Goes Flat on page 9‑74
.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
To use the air compressor to inflate
a tire with air only and not sealant:
page 9‑93
.
2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)
and the power plug (H).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until it is tight.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-91
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on
9. Press the on/off (B) button to
turn the compressor on.
If you inflate the tire higher
than the recommended
pressure you can adjust the
excess pressure by pressing
the pressure deflation
button (D), if equipped, until the
proper pressure reading is
reached. This option is only
functional when using the air
only hose (G).
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
page 4‑12
.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
pressure using the pressure
gauge (C). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑59.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
11. Press the on/off button (B) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
The pressure gauge (C) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate reading. The
compressor may be turned
on/off until the correct pressure
is reached.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
usage.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
8. Turn the selector switch (A)
clockwise to the Air Only
position.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-92
Vehicle Care
13. Disconnect the air only
hose (G) from the tire
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
valve stem, by turning it
counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
To remove the sealant canister:
1. Unwrap the sealant hose.
14. Replace the air only hose (G)
and the power plug (H) and
cord back in its original
location.
2. Press the canister release
button.
3. Pull up and remove the canister.
4. Replace with a new canister
which is available from your
dealer/retailer.
15. Place the equipment in the
original storage location in the
vehicle.
The tire sealant and compressor kit
has an accessory adapter located in
a compartment on the bottom of its
housing that may be used to inflate
air mattresses, balls, etc.
5. Push the new canister into
place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
Tire Changing
9-93
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
To access the spare tire and tools:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Manual) on page 1‑13 or
Liftgate (Power) on page 1‑14.
Without Selector Switch
This vehicle may have a tire sealant
and compressor kit in place of a
jack or spare tire. It is located
in a foam container in the rear
compartment storage area. See
Cargo Management System on
With Selector Switch
page 3‑5
.
2. Press on the bottom of the
handle assembly to unlatch it
and lift up on the handle.
The prop rod locks into place
when open.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-94
Vehicle Care
3. Remove the spare tire cover.
4. Remove the nut retaining the
spare tire.
6. Remove the wing nut (D).
7. Remove the extension (A),
jack (B) and wheel wrench (C)
and place them near the tire
being changed.
5. Remove the spare tire and place
it next to the tire being changed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-95
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Take off the wheel cover or center
cap, if the vehicle has one, to reach
the wheel bolts.
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 9‑74 for more
information.
2. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen and
remove the wheel nut caps.
4. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen all
the wheel nuts, but do not
remove them yet.
6. Position the jack lift head at the
jack location nearest the flat tire.
Do not try to remove plastic caps
from the cover or center cap.
The jacking location is indicated
by a V-shaped notch in the
plastic molding. The jack must
not be used in any other
position.
3. Pull the cover or center cap
away from the wheel. Store the
wheel cover in the cargo area
until you have the flat tire
repaired or replaced.
5. Place the jack near the flat tire.
Notice: Make sure that the jack
lift head is in the correct position
or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-96
Vehicle Care
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs is
dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
WARNING
{
7. Insert the hooked end of the
extension handle through the
jack and the flat end through the
wheel wrench.
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
8. Turn the extension with the
wheel wrench clockwise to raise
the jack lift head until the jack
just fits under the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-97
10. Put the compact spare tire
near you.
WARNING (Continued)
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 9‑74
.
9. Raise the vehicle by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise until the
slots in the jack head fit into the
metal flange located behind the
triangle on the plastic moulding.
Remove all of the wheel nuts.
11. Remove the flat tire.
Notice: Using a jack to raise the
vehicle without positioning it
correctly could damage your
vehicle. When raising your
vehicle on a jack, be sure to
position it correctly under the
frame and avoid contact with the
plastic molding.
WARNING
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
12. Remove any rust or dirt from
the wheel bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare wheel.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-98
Vehicle Care
13. Place the compact spare tire
on the wheel-mounting surface.
WARNING
{
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
WARNING
{
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
14. Reinstall the wheel nuts.
Tighten each nut by hand until
the wheel is held against
the hub.
16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
a crisscross sequence, as
shown.
Specifications on page 11‑2 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
15. Lower the vehicle by turning
the jack handle
17. Lower the jack all the way and
remove the jack from under the
vehicle.
counterclockwise.
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage. To
avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on
page 11‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
with the wheel wrench.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-99
When reinstalling the wheel cover
or center cap on the full-size tire,
tighten all five plastic caps hand
snug with the aid of the wheel
wrench and tighten them with
the wheel wrench an additional
one‐quarter of a turn.
To store the flat or spare tire and
tools:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Manual) on page 1‑13 or
Liftgate (Power) on page 1‑14
for more information.
2. Put back all tools as they were
stored in the rear storage
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
on your vehicle's compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or
the spare could be damaged.
compartment and put the
compartment cover back on. For
more information, see “Storing
the Compact Spare Tire and
Tools” next in this section.
5. Attach the strap to the cargo
tie-down in the rear of the
vehicle.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
3. Install the cargo cover. For more
information, see Cargo
Management System on
WARNING
{
page 3‑5
.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
4. Place the tire, lying flat, in the
rear storage compartment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-100
Vehicle Care
convenience. Of course, it is best to
replace the spare with a full-size tire
as soon as possible. The spare tire
will last longer and be in good
Compact Spare Tire
WARNING
{
shape in case it is needed again.
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
Notice: When the compact spare
is installed, do not take the
vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The
compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel and other parts of the
vehicle.
6. Route the strap through the
wheel, as shown.
If this vehicle has a compact spare
tire it was fully inflated when the
vehicle was new, however, it can
lose air after a time. Check the
inflation pressure regularly. It should
be 420 kPa (60 psi).
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
7. Attach the strap to the other
cargo tie-down in the rear of the
vehicle.
Do not mix the compact spare tire or
wheel with other wheels or tires.
They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
and its wheel together.
8. Tighten the strap.
After installing the compact spare
on the vehicle, stop as soon as
possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The
compact spare is made to perform
well at speeds up to 105 km/h
(65 mph) for distances up to
5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size
tire repaired or replaced at your
The compact spare is for temporary
use only. Replace the compact
spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
compact spare. Using them can
damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not
use tire chains on the compact
spare.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-101
Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to
the vehicle that would not be
covered by the warranty.
2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can reach,
but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they
are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You
would not be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical
systems.
Jump Starting
If the vehicle battery has run down,
you may want to use another
vehicle and some jumper cables to
start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not
work, and it could damage the
vehicle.
WARNING
{
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
To avoid the possibility of the
vehicles rolling, set the parking
brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start
procedure. Put the transmission
in P (Park) before setting the
parking brake.
.
Notice: If the other vehicle's
system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only
use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump
start your vehicle.
They contain acid that can
burn you.
.
They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-102
Vehicle Care
Notice: If you leave the radio or
other accessories on during the
jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the
radio and other accessories when
jump starting the vehicle.
To uncover the remote
positive (+) terminal, lift open the
access panel on the battery
cover indicated by the (+) sign.
WARNING
{
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
3. Turn off the ignition on both
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory
power outlet. Turn off the radio
and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks,
helping save both batteries and
the radio.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
remote positive (+) terminal (A)
and a remote negative (−)
terminal (B). The remote
positive (+) terminal is located in
the engine compartment on the
driver side of the vehicle, above
the rear of the battery. The
remote negative (−) terminal is a
stud located in the engine
compartment on the driver side
of the vehicle, on the front tie
bar. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 9‑6 for
more information on location.
4. Open the hood on the other
vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−)
terminal locations on that
vehicle.
Open the hood on your vehicle
and find the remote positive (+)
and remote negative (−) jump
starting terminals.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-103
Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a
short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts.
Do not connect the negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal
on the dead battery because this
can cause sparks.
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Using an open flame near a
battery can cause battery gas to
explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you
need more light.
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do
not have loose or missing
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that
first. If you do not, explosive gas
could be present.
insulation. If they do, you could
get a shock. The vehicles could
also be damaged.
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
Before you connect the cables,
here are some basic things you
should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch
metal. Connect it to the
positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-104
Vehicle Care
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
10. Now start the vehicle with the
good battery and run the
engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step. The
other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or
to a remote negative (−) terminal
on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or
other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
Part or Remote Negative (−)
Terminal
9. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) cable away from the
dead battery, but not near
engine parts that move. The
electrical connection is just as
good there, and the chance of
sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Your vehicle has a remote (−)
terminal for this purpose.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-105
To disconnect the jumper cables
from both vehicles, do the following:
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common
types of recreational vehicle towing
are known as dinghy towing and
dolly towing. Dinghy towing is
towing the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground. Dolly towing
is towing the vehicle with two
wheels on the ground and two
wheels up on a device known as a
dolly.
Towing
1. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead
battery.
Towing the Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled
vehicle should be towed with all four
wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional
towing service if the disabled
vehicle must be towed.
2. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
To tow the vehicle behind
another vehicle for recreational
purposes — such as behind a
motorhome, see Recreational
Vehicle Towing following.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.
5. Close the access panel on the
battery cover, if applicable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-106
Vehicle Care
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
Dinghy Towing
Front-wheel‐drive and
all-wheel-drive vehicles may be
dinghy towed from the front. These
vehicles can also be towed by
placing them on a platform trailer
with all four wheels off of the
ground. For other towing options,
see “Dolly Towing” following in this
section.
.
What is the towing capacity of
the towing vehicle? Be sure to
read the tow vehicle
manufacturer's
recommendations.
.
What is the distance that will be
travelled? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
For vehicles being dinghy towed,
the vehicle should be run at the
beginning of each day and at each
RV fuel stop for about five minutes.
This will ensure proper lubrication of
transmission components.
To tow the vehicle from the front
with all four wheels on the ground:
.
Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your
dealer/retailer or trailering
professional for additional advice
and equipment
1. Position the vehicle that will be
towed and secure it to the
towing vehicle.
2. Place the ignition position to
ACC/ACCESSORY. See Ignition
Positions on page 8‑17.
recommendations.
.
Is the vehicle ready to be
towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be
towed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-107
3. Shift the transmission to
N (Neutral). See Shifting Out of
Park on page 8‑21.
Once the destination has been
reached:
Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with
the front drive wheels on the
ground if one of the front tires is
a compact spare tire. Towing with
two different tire sizes on the
front of the vehicle can cause
severe damage to the
1. Set the parking brake.
4. Turn all accessories off.
2. Shift the transmission to
Notice: If the vehicle is towed
without performing each of the
steps listed under “Dinghy
P (Park). See Shifting Into Park
on page 8‑20
.
transmission.
3. Place the ignition position to
LOCK/OFF. See Ignition
Positions on page 8‑17.
Towing,” the automatic
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel‐Drive
Vehicles)
transmission could be damaged.
Be sure to follow all steps of the
dinghy towing procedure prior to
and after towing the vehicle.
4. Start the engine and let it idle for
more than three minutes before
driving the vehicle.
All-wheel‐drive vehicles should not
be towed with two wheels on the
ground. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed on
a platform trailer with all four wheels
off of the ground or dinghy towed
from the front.
Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is
exceeded while towing the
vehicle, it could be damaged.
Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph)
while towing the vehicle.
Notice: Too much or too
little fluid can damage the
transmission. Be sure that the
transmission fluid is at the proper
level before towing with all four
wheels on the ground.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-108
Vehicle Care
3. Set the parking brake.
Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel‐
Drive Vehicles)
4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
5. Follow the dolly manufacturer's
instructions for preparing the
vehicle and dolly for towing.
6. Release the parking brake.
Towing the Vehicle From
the Rear
Notice: Towing the vehicle from
the rear could damage it. Also,
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have
the vehicle towed from the rear.
To tow the vehicle from the front
with the rear wheels on the ground,
do the following:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
page 8‑20
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-109
Notice: Machine compounding or
aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
Appearance Care
Bright metal parts should be
cleaned regularly to keep their
luster. Wash with water or use
chrome polish on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Exterior Care
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth and a car washing soap to
clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
the Vehicle” later in this section.
Use special care with aluminum
trim. To avoid damaging protective
trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to
clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal
parts.
Foreign materials such as calcium
chloride and other salts, ice melting
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of the vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use
waxes and polishes that are
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather and
chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To keep
the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-110
Vehicle Care
Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain
acid or abrasives, as they can
damage the paint, metal or plastic
on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer. Follow all
manufacturer directions regarding
correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product.
High pressure car washes could
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the
surface of the vehicle. Use of power
washers exceeding 8,274 kPa
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
keep it clean by washing it often.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight and use a car
washing soap.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain
chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on the
vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on the vehicle
or damage may occur and it
would not be covered by the
warranty.
Notice: Conveyor systems on
some automatic car washes could
damage the vehicle. There may
not be enough clearance for the
undercarriage. Check with the car
wash manager before using the
automatic car wash.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
During very cold, damp weather
frequent application may be
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
required. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 10‑6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-111
Notice: Using strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use only approved
cleaners on aluminum or
Notice: Using chrome polish on
aluminum wheels could damage
the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
The vehicle may have either
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft
clean cloth with mild soap and
water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft
clean towel. A wax may then be
applied.
Use chrome polish only on
chrome-plated wheels, but avoid
any painted surface of the wheel,
and buff off immediately after
application.
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is
similar to the painted surface of the
vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because the surface could
be damaged. Do not use chrome
polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other
chrome trim may be damaged if
the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been
sprayed with magnesium, calcium
or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for
conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the vehicle's
Notice: Driving the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
chrome with soap and water after
exposure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-112
Vehicle Care
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Tires
Finish Damage
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
clean the tires.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint
free cloth or paper towel soaked
with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can
be corrected in your dealer's/
Sheet Metal Damage
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
if they are worn or damaged.
retailer's body and paint shop.
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Underbody Maintenance
Wipers can be damaged by:
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
.
Extreme dusty conditions
.
Sand and salt
.
Heat and sun
.
Snow and ice, without proper
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty.
removal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-113
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody with
plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt
packed in close areas of the frame
should be loosened before being
flushed. Your dealer/retailer or an
underbody car washing system can
do this.
result from using cleaners on
Interior Care
surfaces for which they were not
intended. Apply the cleaner directly
to the cleaning cloth to prevent
over-spray. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces
immediately.
The vehicle's interior will continue to
look its best if it is cleaned often.
Dust and dirt can accumulate on the
upholstery and cause damage to
the carpet, fabric, leather, and
plastic surfaces. Stains should be
removed quickly as extreme heat
could cause them to set rapidly.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces on
the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the
rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Lighter colored interiors may
require more frequent cleaning.
Newspapers and garments that can
transfer color to home furnishings
can also transfer color to the
vehicle's interior.
Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Cleaners can contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the
vehicle's interior. Before using
cleaners, read and adhere to all
safety instructions on the label.
While cleaning the vehicle's interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by
opening the vehicle's doors and
windows.
Remove dust from small buttons
and knobs with a small brush with
soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has products for
cleaning the vehicle's interior. When
cleaning the vehicle's interior, only
use cleaners specifically designed
for the surfaces that are being
cleaned. Permanent damage can
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-114
Vehicle Care
.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Avoid laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much
soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
water is a good guide.
Do not clean the interior using the
following cleaners or techniques:
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
brush attachment to remove dust
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
with a beater bar in the nozzle may
only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils,
always try to remove them first with
plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of
the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
.
Never use a knife or any other
sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
.
Never use a stiff brush. It can
cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
.
.
.
Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery while cleaning.
Never apply heavy pressure or
rub aggressively with a cleaning
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.
Damage to the vehicle's interior
may result from the use of many
organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
.
For liquids: gently blot the
remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no
more can be removed.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
9-115
To clean:
If any of the soil remains, a
Leather
To remove dust, a soft cloth
commercial fabric cleaner or spot
lifter may be necessary. Test a small
hidden area for colorfastness before
using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression
that a ring formation may result,
clean the entire surface.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
cloth with water or club soda.
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat, steam,
or spot lifters or spot removers,
or shoe polish on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may
2. Remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
A paper towel can be used to
blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet after the cleaning
process.
4. Continue to gently rub the
soiled area.
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process with plain water.
permanently change the
appearance and feel of the leather
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the vehicle's interior
because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-116
Vehicle Care
appearance and feel of the interior
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the vehicle's interior
because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth
WARNING
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or
removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect soft plastic surfaces
may permanently change the
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
10-1
Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see
your dealer/retailer.
General Information
Notice: Maintenance intervals,
checks, inspections,
Service and
Maintenance
The maintenance schedule is for
vehicles that:
recommended fluids, and
lubricants are necessary to keep
this vehicle in good working
condition. Damage caused by
failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
.
Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 10-2
on page 8‑11
.
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
.
.
Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
As the vehicle owner, you are
responsible for the scheduled
maintenance in this section. We
recommend having your dealer/
retailer perform these services.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
keep the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions for
better air quality.
Use the recommended fuel. See
Recommended Fuel on
page 8‑45
.
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 10-9
Because of all the different ways
people use vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
Please read the information under
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-2
Service and Maintenance
The proper replacement parts,
Scheduled
Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil
Soon Message Displays
WARNING
{
fluids, and lubricants to use are
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑6 and
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 10‑8. We recommend the use
of genuine parts from your dealer/
retailer.
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous. Some jobs can
cause serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how and
the proper tools and equipment.
If in doubt, see your dealer/
retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See
Doing Your Own Service Work on
Change engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil on page 9‑10. An
Emission Control Service.
Rotation of New Tires
When the “Change Engine Oil
To maintain ride, handling, and
performance of the vehicle, it is
important that the first rotation
service for new tires be performed
when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km
(5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire
Rotation on page 9‑66.
Soon” message displays, service is
required for the vehicle as soon as
possible, within the next 1 000 km/
600 miles. If driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system
might not indicate the need for
vehicle service for more than a year.
The engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and
the oil life system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained
service technicians who will perform
this work and reset the system.
page 9‑4
.
At your General Motors dealer/
retailer, you can be certain that you
will receive the highest level of
service available. Your dealer/
retailer has specially trained service
technicians, uses genuine GM
replacement parts, as well as, up to
date tools and equipment to ensure
fast and accurate diagnostics.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
10-3
.
.
Windshield wiper blade
Steering and suspension
If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since
the last service. Reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on
inspection for wear, cracking,
or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning,
if contaminated. See Exterior
Care on page 9‑109. Worn or
damaged wiper blade
inspection. Visual inspection for
damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear.
.
Body hinges and latches, key
lock cylinders, folding seat
hardware, and sunroof (if
equipped) lubrication. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 10‑6. More
frequent lubrication may be
required when vehicle is
exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
page 9‑12
.
replacement. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 9‑29.
Every Engine Oil Change
.
.
.
.
.
Change engine oil and filter. See
Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑59.
Engine Oil on page 9‑10. An
Emission Control Service.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 9‑66.
.
Engine coolant level check. See
Engine Coolant on page 9‑17.
Rotate tires. See Tire Rotation
.
Engine cooling system
on page 9‑66
.
inspection. Visual inspection of
hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.
Fluids visual leak check (or
every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). A leak in any
system must be repaired and the
fluid level checked.
.
.
Restraint system component
check. See Safety System
Check on page 2‑26.
.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
.
.
Engine air cleaner filter
inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑14.
Automatic transmission fluid
level check and adding fluid,
if needed. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on
page 9‑23
.
Brake system inspection (or
every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).
page 9‑13
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-4
Service and Maintenance
Once a Year
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles
Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
.
See Starter Switch Check on
page 9‑28
.
.
Fuel system inspection for
.
Engine oil level check. See
damage or leaks.
.
.
.
.
See Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check on
page 9‑28
Engine Oil on page 9‑10.
.
Passenger compartment air
.
Engine coolant level check. See
.
filter replacement (or every
12 months, whichever occurs
first). More frequent replacement
may be required if vehicle is
driven regularly under dusty
conditions.
Engine Coolant on page 9‑17.
Exhaust system and nearby heat
shields inspection for loose or
damaged components.
.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 9‑23
.
Accelerator pedal check for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
Once a Month
.
.
Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 9‑59.
If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit, check the
sealant expiration date printed
on the instruction label of the
kit. See Tire Sealant and
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 9‑66.
Compressor Kit (Without
Selector Switch) on page 9‑76
or Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit (With Selector Switch) on
page 9‑84
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
10-5
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.
.
.
Engine air cleaner filter
Automatic transmission fluid
Engine cooling system drain,
replacement. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑14.
change (normal service). See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on
flush, and refill, cooling system
and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator
and air conditioning condenser
(or every 5 years, whichever
occurs first). See Cooling
page 9‑13
.
.
Automatic transmission fluid
.
change (severe service) for
vehicles mainly driven in heavy
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly
or mountainous terrain, when
frequently towing a trailer,
or used for taxi, police,
Spark plug replacement. An
Emission Control Service.
System on page 9‑16. An
Emission Control Service.
.
Engine accessory drive belt
or delivery service. See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on
inspection for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An
Emission Control Service.
page 9‑13
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-6
Service and Maintenance
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special engine oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard can be identified with the American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. However,
not all synthetic API oils with the starburst symbol will meet this GM
standard. Look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
For the proper viscosity, see Engine Oil on page 9‑10.
Engine Oil
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 9‑17.
Engine Coolant
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88863461, in
Canada 88863462).
Hydraulic Brake System
Windshield Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Power Steering System
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission
(3.0L V6 Engine)
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
10-7
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Automatic Transmission
(2.8L V6 Engine)
Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 19256039, in
Canada 19256040).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubrication
Key Lock Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood, Door, and Folding Seat Hinges
Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint
Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021668, in
Canada 89021674).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-8
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
20897358
A3147C
2.8L V6 Engine
12593333
89017524
13271191
PF457G
PF48
3.0L V6 Engine
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
CF176
2.8L V6 Engine
12622561
12622561
41–109
41–109
3.0L V6 Engine
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 65.0 cm (25.6 in)
Passenger Side – 42.5 cm (16.7 in)
Rear – 30.0 cm (11.8 in)
25979378
25979379
20825882
—
—
—
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
10-9
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-10
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Maintenance Stamp
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
10-11
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Maintenance Stamp
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-12
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Maintenance Stamp
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
11-1
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
Technical Data
The eighth character in the VIN is
the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle's engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 11‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 11-4
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.
Model designation
.
Paint information
.
Production options and special
equipment
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-2
Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Application
Capacities
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Engine Cooling System
2.8L V6 Engine
3.0L V6 Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
2.8L V6 Engine
3.0L V6 Engine
Fuel Tank
11.9 L
11.9 L
12.6 qt
12.6 qt
5.7 L
5.7 L
6.0 qt
6.0 qt
79.5 L
21.0 gal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
11-3
Capacities
English
Application
Metric
Transmission Fluid
2.8L V6 6–Speed Automatic (Transmission Requires No
Fluid Replacement)
—
—
3.0L V6 6–Speed Automatic* (Drain and Refill)
9.0 L
9.5 qt
Wheel Nut Torque
150 Y
110 ft lb
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 9‑13 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
2.8L V6 (LAU)
3.0L V6 (LF1)
VIN Code
Transmission
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
1.10 mm (0.043 in)
1.10 mm (0.043 in)
4
Y
Automatic
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-4
Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
2.8L, 3.0L V6 Engines
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-1
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Customer Information
Customer
Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer's sales or
service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Customer Assistance
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 12-4
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 12-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Collision Damage Repair . . . 12-13
Service Publications
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 12-18
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-19
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service or
parts manager, contact the owner of
the dealership or the general
manager.
Ordering Information . . . . . . 12-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-2
Customer Information
STEP TWO : If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the United States,
call the Cadillac Customer
Assistance Center, 24 hours a day,
at 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, call
the Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre at
When contacting Cadillac,
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest
following Step One first.
decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any
other venue for relief available
to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them at
the following address:
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both
General Motors and your dealer are
committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. However, if you continue to
remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, you can file with the Better
Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
1-888-446-2000.
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give your
inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to
give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out of court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may
be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the
.
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). This is available from the
vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and
program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the
present mileage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-3
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
Customer Assistance
Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to
call the toll-free number for
assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac,
the letter should be addressed to:
General Motors Participation in
the Mediation/Arbitration Program
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
the General Motors Customer
Communication Centre,
In the event that you do not feel
your concerns have been addressed
after the following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two.
General Motors of Canada Limited
wants you to be aware of its
United States — Customer
Assistance
1-800-263-3777 (English),
participation in a no-charge
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to
the Mediation/Arbitration Program at
the following address:
mediation/Arbitration program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
approximately 70 days. We believe
our impartial program offers
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-882-1112
Your inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-4
Customer Information
From Puerto Rico:
dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Online Owner Center
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/
cadillac
General Motors de Mexico, S. de
R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
Canada — Customer
Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
Information and services
customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient
place.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
.
Digital owner manual, warranty
information, and more
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance
Center. Any TTY user can
.
Online service and maintenance
1-888-446-2000
records
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-882-1112
.
Find Cadillac dealers for service
nationwide
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
.
Overseas — Customer
Assistance
Recall notices for your specific
vehicle
OnStar® and GM Cardmember
.
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit.
communicate with Cadillac by
Services Earnings summaries
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
GM Mobility
12-5
Other Helpful Links:
Here are a few of the valuable tools
and services you will have
access to:
Cadillac — www.cadillac.com
Reimbursement Program
Cadillac Merchandise —
www.cadillaccollection.com
.
My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.
Help Center — www.cadillac.com/
helpcenter
.
My Dealers/Retailers: Save
.
FAQ
details such as address and
phone number for each of your
preferred GM dealers/retailers.
.
Contact Us
This program, available to qualified
applicants, can reimburse you up to
$1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment
required for your vehicle, such as
hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift.
My GM Canada (Canada) —
www.gm.ca
.
My Driveway: Access quick links
to parts and service estimates,
check trade-in values,
or schedule a service
appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your
driveway profile.
My GM Canada is a
password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save
information on GM vehicles, get
personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
The offer is available for a very
limited period of time from the date
of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your
.
My Preferences: Manage your
profile and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
vehicle's eligibility, visit
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gm.ca.
gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at
1-800-323-9935. Text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-6
Customer Information
.
.
Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle
General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
details. TTY users call
Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle
1-800-263-3830.
.
Description of the problem
Roadside Assistance
Program
Coverage
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Services are provided up to
5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever comes first.
.
In the United States or Canada, call
1-800-882-1112.
Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only,
call 1-888-889-2438.
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service is
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
provided to unlock the vehicle if
you are locked out. A remote
unlock may be available if you
have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present
identification before this service
is given.
Calling for Assistance
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information
ready:
.
Your name, home address, and
home telephone number
.
Telephone number of your
location
.
Location of the vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-7
.
.
Emergency Tow From a Public
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Cadillac dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: If your trip is
Each technician travels with a
specially equipped service vehicle
complete with the necessary
Cadillac parts and tools required to
handle most roadside repairs.
interrupted due to a warranty
failure, incidental expenses may
be reimbursed during the 5 year/
100,000 miles (160 000 km)
Powertrain warranty period.
Items considered are hotel,
meals, and rental car.
Services Not Included in
Roadside Assistance
.
.
Flat Tire Change: Service is
provided to change a flat tire
with spare tire. The spare tire,
if equipped, must be in good
condition and properly inflated.
It is your responsibility for the
repair or replacement of the tire
if it is not covered by the
warranty.
Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
Cadillac Technician Roadside
Service (U.S. only)
.
Legal fines.
.
Cadillac's exceptional Roadside
Service is more than an auto club or
towing service. It provides every
Cadillac owner in the United States
with the advantage of contacting a
Cadillac advisor and, where
available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site
service.
Mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains,
or other traction devices.
.
Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
.
.
Battery Jump Start: Service is
provided to jump start a dead
battery.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed
maps of North America are
provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
most scenic route. Additional
travel information is also
A dealer technician will travel to
your location within a 30 mile radius
of a participating Cadillac
dealership. If beyond this radius, we
will arrange to have your car towed
to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
available. Allow three weeks for
delivery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-8
Customer Information
.
Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
Roadside Service
In the United States or Canada, call
.
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement
1-800-882-1112.
Assistance advisor may give you
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
permission to get local
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only,
call 1-888-889-2438.
emergency road service. You will
receive payment, up to $100,
after sending the original receipt
to Roadside Assistance.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information
ready:
.
Trip Routing Service: Limit of
six requests per year.
.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Your name, home address, and
Assistance: Pre-authorization,
original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders are
required. Once authorization has
been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you
make arrangements and explain
how to receive payment.
home telephone number
.
Telephone number of your
location
.
Location of the vehicle
.
Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle
.
Description of the problem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-9
It is your responsibility for the
repair or replacement of the tire
if it is not covered by the
warranty.
Coverage
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
.
Services are provided up to 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever comes first.
Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
.
.
Battery Jump Start: Service is
provided to jump start a dead
battery.
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service is
provided to unlock the vehicle if
you are locked out. A remote
unlock may be available if you
have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present
identification before this service
is given.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed
maps of North America are
provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
most scenic route. Additional
travel information is also
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
available. Allow three weeks for
delivery.
.
Emergency Tow From a Public
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Cadillac dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: If your trip is
Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
interrupted due to a warranty
failure, incidental expenses may
be reimbursed during the 5 year/
100,000 miles (160 000 km)
Powertrain warranty period.
Items considered are hotel,
meals, and rental car.
.
Flat Tire Change: Service is
provided to change a flat tire
with spare tire. The spare tire,
if equipped, must be in good
condition and properly inflated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-10
Customer Information
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Pre-authorization,
original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders are
required. Once authorization has
been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you
make arrangements and explain
how to receive payment.
Cadillac Technician Roadside
Service (U.S. only)
Services Not Included in
Roadside Assistance
.
Cadillac's exceptional Roadside
Service is more than an auto club or
towing service. It provides every
Cadillac owner in the United States
with the advantage of contacting a
Cadillac advisor and, where
available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site
service.
Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
.
Legal fines.
.
Mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains,
or other traction devices.
.
Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may give you
permission to get local
emergency road service. You will
receive payment, up to $100,
after sending the original receipt
to Roadside Assistance.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
.
Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
A dealer technician will travel to
your location within a 30 mile radius
of a participating Cadillac
dealership. If beyond this radius, we
will arrange to have your car towed
to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
Each technician travels with a
specially equipped service vehicle
complete with the necessary
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
.
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
Cadillac parts and tools required to
handle most roadside repairs.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.
.
Trip Routing Service: Limit of
six requests per year.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
Transportation Options
12-11
Scheduling Service
Appointments
Courtesy Transportation
Program
Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by
providing several transportation
options. Depending on the
When your vehicle requires
warranty service, contact your
dealer/retailer and request an
appointment. By scheduling a
service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer/
retailer can help minimize your
inconvenience.
To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the
Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and
extended powertrain, and hybrid
specific warranties in both the U.S.
and Canada.
circumstances, your dealer can offer
you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide
shuttle service to get you to your
destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle
service to a destination up to
10 miles (16 km) from the
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
Several courtesy transportation
options are available to assist in
reducing your inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
immediately, keep driving it until it
can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call
your dealership/retailer, let them
know this, and ask for instructions.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
dealership.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to
bring the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the
same day repair.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-12
Customer Information
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program
Information
Your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is
kept for a warranty repair. If you
obtain a rental vehicle on your own,
please see your dealer for the
maximum number of days allowed
and the allowance per rental day.
Rental reimbursement must be
supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete
a rental agreement and meet state,
local, and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary
and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible
for fuel usage charges and may also
be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage,
or rental usage beyond the
If your vehicle requires warranty
repairs, and public transportation is
used instead of the dealer's shuttle
service, the expense must be
supported by original receipts and
can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle
service. In addition, for U.S.
customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or
relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be
available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact your
dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be
administered by appropriate dealer
personnel.
General Motors reserves the
right to unilaterally modify, change,
or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to
resolve all questions of claim
eligibility pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
supported by original receipts. See
your dealer for information regarding
the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other
transportation costs.
completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like-vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-13
Recycled original equipment parts
may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice
to maintain your vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
may not perform properly in
Collision Damage Repair
subsequent collisions. Aftermarket
parts are not covered by your GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any vehicle failure related to such
parts are not covered by that
warranty.
If your vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have the
damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish your vehicle's
resale value, and safety
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a
collision repair facility that meets
your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained
performance can be compromised
in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle's
designed appearance, durability,
and safety are preserved. The use
of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle
Warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also
available. These are made by
companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your
vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and
technicians and comparable
equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-14
Customer Information
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read your lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
For emergency towing see
Roadside Service on page 12‑8.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM
vehicle with comprehensive and
collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the
quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation
for damage repairs by using
Gather the following information:
.
Driver's name, address, phone
number
.
Driver's license number
.
Owner's name, address, phone
number
If a Crash Occurs
.
Vehicle license plate
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a police
officer.
.
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
Vehicle make, model and
model year
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your
vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not
available from your current
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.
Insurance company and policy
number
.
General description of the
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
damage to the other vehicle
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-15
Choose a reputable repair facility
that uses quality replacement parts.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
section.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist
on Genuine GM parts. Remember if
your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle
Service Publications
Ordering Information
Service Manuals
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? on page 2‑34.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on engines,
transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering,
body, etc.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
Service Bulletins
In the event that your vehicle
requires damage repairs, GM
recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a
pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there,
or have it towed there. Specify to
the facility that any required
replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered by
your GM vehicle warranty.
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle.
If another party's insurance
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as cost stays within reasonable
limits.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-16
Customer Information
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
Owner Information
Reporting Safety
Defects
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The
owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web
at: helminc.com
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
Or you can write to:
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
Note to Canadian Customers: All
listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Canadian residents are to
make checks payable in U.S. funds.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
Current and Past Model Order
Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles. To
request an order form, specify year
and model name of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-17
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, notify Transport
Canada immediately, in addition to
notifying General Motors of Canada
Limited. Call them at
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Transport Canada) in a situation like
this, please notify General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Administrator, NHTSA
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
In Canada, call 1‐888‐446‐2000,
or write:
You can also obtain other
information about motor
vehicle safety from
Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
http://www.safercar.gov.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-18
Customer Information
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven.
For example, your vehicle uses
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control the
vehicle. These modules may store
data to help your dealer/retailer
technician service your vehicle.
Some modules may also store data
about how you operate the vehicle,
such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may
also retain the owner’s personal
preferences, such as radio pre-sets,
seat positions, and temperature
settings.
This vehicle has an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a
vehicle's systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
Important: EDR data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash
investigation.
.
How various systems in your
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
vehicle were operating
.
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened
.
How far, if at all, the driver was
pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was
traveling
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
12-19
GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request of police or
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
Navigation System
Radio Frequency
Statement
If your vehicle has a navigation
system, use of the system may
result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and
other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with RSS-210/211 of
Industry Canada.
required by law. Data that GM
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
1. The device may not cause
interference.
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences such
as key fobs for remote door locking/
unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with any
other GM system containing
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you
subscribe to the OnStar services,
please refer to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions for information on
data collection and use. See also
OnStar® System on page 4‑46 in
this manual for more information.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
personal information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-20
Customer Information
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-1
Airbag System (cont.)
What Will You See After
Antilock Brake
A
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-113
Armrest Stoarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Assistance Program,
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Audio System
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 6-2
Automatic
Accessories and
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .2-34
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .2-30
Airbags
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-41
Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
AdjustmentS
Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . 9-14
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
How Does an Airbag
Adding Equipment to the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Passenger Status Indicator . . .4-19
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Alarm System
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . 8-28, 9-27
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Antenna
Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 8-23
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . 6-28, 6-34
Multi-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Anti-Theft
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Alarm System Messages . . . . .4-39
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-2
INDEX
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34, 9-35
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . .9-42
Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Cargo
B
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Management System . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Cautions, Danger, and
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-101
Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . 9-29
Bluetooth . . . . 6-47, 6-48, 6-52, 6-63
Brake
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
CD
C
Pedal and Adjustable
DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 3-2
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 4-20
Check
Engine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Child Restraints
Infants and Young
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
California
Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .8-46
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13, 1-14
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .2-52
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57, 2-59
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Where to Put the Restraint . . .2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-3
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-113
Climate Control Systems
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Covers
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 12-13
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 12-18
Daytime Running
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10, 4-11
Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 12-13
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 9-100
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Compressor Kit, Tire
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76, 9-84
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Coolant
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Customer Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 12-15
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . 6-28, 6-34
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Door
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Rear Seat Pass-Through . . . . .2-12
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . .8-28, 9-27
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Engine Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-4
INDEX
Driving
Engine (cont.)
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Coolant Temperature
E
Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Characteristics and
ECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Economy Mode
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Cooling System Messages . . .4-35
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Gasoline Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .8-23
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 12-18
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-50
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 8-8
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Dual Automatic Climate
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-36
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 4-24
Electrical Equipment,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Check and Service Engine
Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . 9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-5
Fuel (cont.)
Filling a Portable Fuel
F
G
Filter
Gages
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-49
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .8-46
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .8-45
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .4-27
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45
Requirements, California . . . . .8-46
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Fuel Economy Gauge . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Rear Compartment Fuse
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 5-5
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . .9-13
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Fog Lamps
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Front Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Gasoline
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45
Gasoline Engine, Starting . . . . . . 8-18
Gauge
Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Gauges
Engine Coolant
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-6
INDEX
General Information
Headlamps (cont.)
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
High Intensity Discharge
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to Wear Safety Belts
Service and Maintenance . . . . .10-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-50
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .4-28
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-2
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .4-29
Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Heated
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
I
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Infants and Young Children,
H
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 5-5
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Adaptive Forward
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 4-4
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 6-1
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 8-8
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . .4-28
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-101
K
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 4-37
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 1-3
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-7
Light
Lights (cont.)
L
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .4-17
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Traction Control System
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .4-24
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Lamps
StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Lighting
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 5-2
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .4-20
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
LATCH System
Replacing Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Latch, Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Liftgate
Adaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-2
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Locks
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 4-27
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . .1-13, 1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-8
INDEX
Messages (cont.)
Mirrors (cont.)
M
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Object Detection System . . . . .4-38
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Mirrors
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Monitor System, Tire
Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . .10-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 4-20
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Mass Storage Media (MEM) . . . 6-25
Messages
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .4-39
Battery Voltage and
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .4-35
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
N
Navigation System
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Net
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Automatic Dimming
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-9
Power
O
P
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .8-18
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Privacy
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-19
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . .12-11
Proposition 65 Warning,
Object Detection System
Park
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .9-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 2-43
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Operation, Infotainment
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Parking
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .8-22
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Passenger Sensing System . . . 2-36
Perchlorate Materials
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Outlets
Requirements, California . . . . . . 9-3
Phone
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Overview
Bluetooth . . . . . . .
6-47, 6-48,
6-52, 6-63
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Overview, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-10
INDEX
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 4-9
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 2-42
Replacing LATCH System
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
R
Radio Frequency
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . 12-17
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Ride Control Systems
Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .8-35
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Selective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 11-4
Running the Vehicle While
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 12-19
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Rear Axle
Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Rear Climate Control System . . . 7-5
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Rear Seat Entertainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .6-45
Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 8-41
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-11
Seats
Service (cont.)
Parts Identification Label . . . . . 11-1
Publications Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Scheduling Appointments . . . .12-11
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-40
Shifting
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Spare Tire
S
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 2-9
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 2-6
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 2-4
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Securing Child
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57, 2-59
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Service
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .2-27
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .2-26
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . 12-17
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 10-2
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 12-11
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . 9-76, 9-84
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100
Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Starting the Gasoline
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . .10-9
Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-12
INDEX
Starting the Vehicle
Tires (cont.)
Sealant and
T
Messsages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Storage
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 12-4
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 1-19
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . 2-6
Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10, 4-11
Tires
Compressor Kit . . . . . . .9-76, 9-84
Sealant and Compressor
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-93
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53
Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-71
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . .9-73
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68
Towing
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .8-50
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-58
General Information . . . . . . . . . .8-50
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 9-105
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-54
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .8-59
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
Mass Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Storage Areas
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Cargo Management System . . . 3-5
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
System
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-93
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74
Inflation Monitor System . . . . . .9-62
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Pressure Monitor System . . . . .9-61
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-13
Traction
Vehicle Care
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . .9-93
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Vehicle Reminder
U
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .8-32
Control System (TCS)/
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 8-38
Uniform Tire Quality
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .8-35
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . .8-35
Trailer
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
Universal Remote System . . . . . 4-48
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .8-59
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Turbo Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
V
Vehicle
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
W
Warning Lights, Gauges,
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-14
INDEX
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 4-41
Washer, Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Where to Put the Child
Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . 9-29
Wipers
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|